巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Onandhati: {'def': '[o + nandhati, a secondary pres. form constructed from naddha after bandhati › baddha; see also apiḷandhati] to bind, fasten; to cover up Vin.II,150 (inf. onandhituṁ); Miln.261. (Page 167)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava+nandh绑+ṁ-a) 绑，掩盖，包装。onandhi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ava + nadh + ŋ-a) 绑，掩盖，包装。onandhi, 【过】。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Onata: {'def': '(Onamati的【过分】) 弯下身，弯下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Onayhati: {'def': '(ava + nah + ya), 包封，遮没，系住。 onayhi, 【过】。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ava+nah+ya), 包封，遮没，系住。onayhi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ava + nayhati] to tie down, to cover over, envelop, shroud DhsA.378 (megho ākāsaṁ o.) -- pp. onaddha. (Page 167)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Onojana: {'def': '【中】分配，授予式。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】分配，授予式。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Onojeti: {'def': '(ava+nuj +e), 献出，分配。onojesi,【过】。onojita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see oṇojeti. (Page 167)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava + nuj + e), 献出，分配。 onojesi, 【过】。 onojita, 【过分】。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Onāha: {'def': '(‹ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati),【中】遮盖物，裹屍布(寿衣)(drawing over, covering, shrouding)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati] drawing over, covering, shrouding D.I,246 (spelt onaha); Miln.300; Dhs.1157 (= megho viya ākāsaṁ kāyaṁ onayhati). (Page 167)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Onīta: {'def': '【过分】已取走，已移掉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[in form = Sk. avanīta, but semantically = apanīta. Thus also BSk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti] only found in one ster. phrase, viz. onīta-patta-pāṇi “having removed (or removing) his hand from the bowl”, a phrase causing constructional difficulties & sometimes taken in glosses as “onitta°” (fr. nij), i. e. having washed (bowl and hands after the meal). The C^s. expl^n. as onīto pattato pāṇi yeva, i. e. “the hand is taken away from the bowl”. The spelling is frequently oṇīta, probably through BB sources. See on term also Trenckner, Notes 66²⁴ & cp. apa-nīta-pātra at M Vastu III,142. The expression is always comb^d. with bhuttāvin “having eaten” and occurs very frequently, e. g. at Vin.II,147: D.I,109 (= DA.I,277, q. v. for the 2 expl^ns. mentioned above M.II,50, 93; S.V,384; A.II,63; Sn.p. 111 (= pattato onītapāṇi, apanītahattha SnA 456); VvA.118; PvA.278. Oneti, prob. for apaneti, see apaneti & pp. onīta. (Page 167)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已取走，已移掉。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Opadhika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upadhi. BSk. after the P., aupadhika Divy 542] forming a substratum for rebirth (always with ref. to puñña, merit). Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 38 as “exceedingly great”; the correct interpretation is given by Dhpāla at VvA.154 as “atta-bhāva-janaka paṭisandhi-pavatti-vipāka-dāyaka”. -- S.I,233 = A.IV,292 = Vv 34²¹; It.20 (v. l. osadhika), 78. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opaguyha: {'def': 'see opavayha. (Page 167)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opakkamika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upakkama] characterising a sensation of pain: attacking suddenly, spasmodic, acute; always in connection with ābādha or vedanā M.I,92, 241; S.IV,230 = A.II,87 = III,131 = V.110 = Nd² 304^IC = Miln.112. (Page 167)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】突然袭击，痉挛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】被想出的办法所引起的。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Opakkhin: {'def': '(adj.) [o + pakkhin, adj. fr. pakkha wing, cp. similarly avapatta] “with wings off” i. e. having one’s wings clipped, powerless A.I,188 (°ṁ karoti to deprive of one’s wings or strength; so read for T. opapakkhiṁ karoti). (Page 167)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opama: {'def': 'at J.I,89 & Sdhp.93 (anopama) stands for ūpama, which metri causā for upama. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opamma: {'def': '【中】直喻，比较。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】直喻，比较。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. upama; cp. Sk. aupamya] likeness, simile, comparison, metaphor M.I,378; Vin.V,164; Miln.1, 70, 330; Vism.117, 622; ThA.290. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opanayika: {'def': '(心灵的)导引;指引;摄入', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【形】领头的，带近来。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】确实有效的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upaneti, upa + nī] leading to (Nibbāna) S.IV,41 sq., 272, 339; V,343; A.I,158; II,198; D.III,5; Vism.217. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】领头的，带近来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Opanayiko: {'def': '(心灵的)导引;指引;摄入', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Opapaccayika: {'def': '(adj.) [= opapātika] having the characteristic of being born without parents, as deva Nett 28 (upādāna). (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opapakkhi: {'def': 'in phrase °ṁ karoti at A.I,188 read opakkhiṁ karoti to deprive of one’s wings, to render powerless. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opapātika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upapatti; the BSk. form is a curious distortion of the P. form, viz. aupapāduka Av. Ś II.89; Divy 300, 627, 649] arisen or reborn without visible cause (i. e. without parents), spontaneous rebirth (Kvu trsl. 283²), apparitional rebirth (Cpd. 165⁴, q. v.) D.I,27, 55, 156; III,132, 230 (°yoni), 265; M.I,34, 73, 287, 401 sq., 436 sq, 465 sq.; II,52; III,22, 80, 247; S.III,206, 240 sq., 246 sq.; IV,348; V,346, 357 sq., 406; A.I,232, 245, 269; II,5, 89, 186; IV,12, 226, 399, 423 sq.; V, 265 sq., 286 sq., 343 sq.; Pug.16, 62, 63; Vbh.412 sq.; Miln.267; Vism.552 sq., 559; DA.I,165, 313. The C. on M.I,34 expl^ns. by “sesa-yoni-paṭikkhepa-vacanaṁ etaṁ”. See also Pug. A 1, § 40. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'opapātī, 【形】没有明显因素而出现的，化生的。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'opapātī(‹upapatti显现﹑往生),【形】化生的(出生时无所托)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Opapātin: {'def': '(adj.) = opapātika, in phrase opapātiyā (for opapātiniyā?) iddhiyā at S.V,282 (so read for T. opapāti ha?) is doubtful reading & perhaps best to be omitted altogether. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oparajja: {'def': 'viceroyalty is v. l. for uparajja. Thus at M.II,76; A.III,154. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opasamika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upa + sama + ika; cp. BSk. aupaśamika Av. Ś II.107; M Vastu II.41] leading to quiet, allaying, quieting; Ep. of Dhamma D.III,264 sq.; A.II,132. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opasāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upasaya, upa + śī] being near at hand or at one’s bidding (?) M.I,328. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opatajja: {'def': '【中】副王之位。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】副王之位。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Opatati: {'def': '[o + pat] to fall or fly down (on), to fall over (w. Acc.) J.II,228 (lokāmisaṁ °anto); VI,561 (°itvā ger.); Miln.368, 396. -- pp. opatita. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opatita: {'def': '[pp. of opatati] falling (down) PvA.29 (udaka; v. l. ovuḷhita, opalahita; context rcads at PvA.29 mahāsobbhehi opatitena udakena, but id. p. at KhA 213 reads mahāsobbha-sannipātehi). (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opatta: {'def': '(adj.) [o + patta, Sk. avapattra] with leaves fallen off, leafless (of trees) J.III,495 (opatta = avapatta nippatta patita-patta C.). (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opavayha: {'def': '【形】可骑的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可骑的。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. upavayha, grd. of upavahati] fit for riding, suitable as conveyance, state-elephant (of the elephant of the king) S.V,351 = Nett 136 (v. l. opaguyha; C. expl^ns. by ārohana-yogga); J.II,20 (SS opavuyha); IV, 91 (v. l. °guyha); VI,488 (T. opavuyha, v. l. opaguyha; gajuttama opavayha = rāja-vāhana C.); DA.I,147 (ārohanayogga opavuyha, v. l. °guyha); VvA.316 (T. opaguyha to be corrected to °vayha). (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opeti: {'def': '[unless we here deal with a very old misspelling for oseti we have to consider it a secondary derivation from opiya in Caus. sense, i e. Caus. fr. upa + i. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78 offers an etym. of ā + vapati, thus opiya would be *āvupiya, a risky conclusion, which besides being discrepant in meaning (āvapati = to distribute) necessitates der. of opiya fr. opati (*āvapati) instead of vice versā. There is no other instance of *āva being contracted to o. Trenckner then puts opiya = ūpiya in tadūpiya (“conform with this”, see ta° I^a), which is however a direct derivation from upa = upaka, upiya, of which a superl. formation is upamā (“likeness”). Trenckner’s expl^n. of ūpiya as der. fr. ā + vap does not fit in with its meaning] to make go into (c. Loc.), to deposit, receive (syn. with osāpeti) S.I,236 (SA na . . pakkhipanti) = Th.2, 283 = J.V,252 (T. upeti); in which Th.2, 283 has oseti (ThA.216, with expl^n. of oseti = ṭhapeti on p. 219). -- aor. opi J.IV,457 (ukkhipi gloss); VI,185 (= pakkhipi gloss). ‹-› ger. opitvā (opetvā?) J.IV,457 (gloss khipetvā). (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ophuṭa: {'def': '[a difficult, but legitimate form arisen out of analogy, fusing ava-vuta (= Sk. vṛta from vṛ; opp. *apāvuta = P. apāruta) and ava-phuṭa (Sk. sphuṭa from sphuṭ). We should probably read ovuta in all instances] covered, obstructed; always in comb^n. āvuta nivuta ophuṭa (oputa, ovuta) D.I,246 (T. ophuta, vv. ll. ophuṭa & opuṭa); M.III,131 (T. ovuṭa); Nd¹ 24 ovuṭa, v. l. SS ophuṭa); Nd² 365 (ophuṭa, v. l. BB oputa; SS ovuta); DA.I,59 (oputa); SnA 596 (oputa = pariyo-naddha); Miln.161 (ovuta). (Page 169)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opilavati: {'def': '[Sk. avaplavati, ava + plu] to be immersed, to sink down S.II,224. -- Caus. opilāpeti (see sep.). (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opilāpeti: {'def': 'opilāveti (ava + plav + e), 浸，使漂浮。 opilāpesi, opilāvesi, 【过】。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of opilavati, cp. Sk. avaplāvayati] to immerse, to dip in or down, to drop (into = Loc.) Vin.I, 157 = 225 = S.I,169 (C.: nimujjapeti, see K. S. 318); M.I,207 = III,157; DhA.III,3 (°āpetvā; so read with vv. ll. for opīḷetvā); J.III,282. -- pp. opilāpita. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Opilāveti (ava+plav+e),浸，使漂浮。opilāpesi, opilāvesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Opilāpita: {'def': '[pp. of opilāpeti] immersed into (Loc.), gutted with water, drenched J.I,212, 214. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Opilāpeti的【过分】) 浸，使漂浮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Opiya: {'def': '【独】放进了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'is metric for upiya [upa + ger. of i] undergoing, going into S.I,199 = Th.1, 119 (nibbānaṁ hadayasmiṁ opiya; Mrs. Rh. D. trsl^s. “suffering N. in thy heart to sink”, S A. hadayasmiṁ pakkhipitvā. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【独】放进了。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Opunāti: {'def': 'also as opuṇāti (Dh) [o + punāti fr. pū] to winnow, sift; fig. lay bare, expose Dh.252 (= bhusaṁ opuṇanto viya DhA.III,375); SnA 312. -- Caus. opunāpeti [cp. BSk. opunāpeti M Vastu III,178] to cause to sift A.I,242; J.I,447. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opuppha: {'def': '[o + puppha] bud, young flower J.VI,497 (vv. ll. p. 498 opaṇṇa & opatta). (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opuñchana: {'def': 'or Opuñjana (nt.) [fr. opuñjeti] heaping up, covering over; a heap, layer DhA.III,296. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opuñchati: {'def': 'is uncertain reading for opuñjeti. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opuñjeti: {'def': 'or °ati [o + puñjeti denom. of puñja, heap] to heap up, make a heap, cover over with (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 153 trsl^s. “cleanse”) Vin.II,176 (opuñjati bhattaṁ); J.IV,377 (opuñchetvā T., but v. l. opuñjetvā; gloss upalimpitvā); DhA.III,296 (opuñchitvā, gloss sammajjitvā). ‹-› Caus. opuñjāpeti in same meaning “to smear” Vin.III,16 (opuñjāpetvā; v. l. opuñchāpetvā). (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opuṇati: {'def': '(ava+pu+ṇā), 吹毛求疵，吹开糠皮，筛撒。opuṇi,【过】。opuṇitvā,【独】。DhpA.v.252./CS:pg.2.238.︰“gahapati, ime sattā nāma mahantampi attano dosaṁ na passanti, avijjamānampi paresaṁ dosaṁ vijjamānaṁ katvā tattha tattha bhusaṁ viya opunantī”ti.(诸有情对自己的缺点视若无睹，对别人不存在的缺点认为是存在的，吹毛求疵(原文为︰吹开谷物bhusaṁ viya opunantī)。))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ava + pu + ṇā), 吹开糠皮，筛撒。 opuṇi, 【过】。 opuṇitvā, 【独】。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Opāna: {'def': '【中】井，免费供应水的地方。anopānabhūtāni,不作井池者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [o + pāna fr. pivati. Vedic avapāna. The P. Commentators however take o as a contracted form of udaka, e. g. Bdhgh. at DA.I,298 = udapāna]. Only in phrase opāna-bhūta (adj.) a man who has become a welling spring as it were, for the satisfaction of all men’s wants; expl^d. as “khata-pokkharaṇī viya hutvā” DA.I,298 = J.V,174. -- Vin.I,236; D.I,137; M.I,379; A.IV,185; Vv 65⁴; Pv IV.1⁶⁰; J.III,142; IV,34; V,172; Vbh.247; Miln.411; Vism.18; VvA.286; DA. 1177, 298. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】井，免费供应水的地方。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Opārambha: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upārambha] acting as a support, supporting, helpful M.II,113. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opāta: {'def': '【阳】陷阱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】陷阱。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[o + pāta fr. patati to fall, Vedic avapāta] -- 1. falling or flying down, downfall, descent J.VI,561. -- 2. a pitfall J.I,143; DhA.IV,211. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opāteti: {'def': '(ava + pat + e), 使下跌，妨碍。 opātesi, 【过】。 opātita, 【过分】。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[o + Caus. of pat] to make fall, to destroy (cp. atipāteti), i. e. 1. to break, to interrupt, in kathaṁ opāteti to interrupt a conversation M.II,10, 122, 168; A.III,137, 392 sq.; Sn.p. 107. -- 2. to drop, to omit (a syllable) Vin.IV,15. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava+pat+e), 使下跌，妨碍。opātesi,【过】。opātita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Opāyika: {'def': '【形】适当的。(p86)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】适当的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Opāṭeti: {'def': '[ava + Caus. of paṭ, Sk. avapāṭayati] to tear asunder, unravel, open Vin.II,150 (chaviṁ opāṭetvā). (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Opīḷeti: {'def': 'in “bhattaṁ pacchiyaṁ opīḷetvā” at DhA.II,3 is with v. l. to be read opilāpetvā (gloss odahitvā), i. e. dropping the food into the basket. (Page 168)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ora: {'def': '(adj.) [compar. formation fr. ava; Vedic avara] below, inferior, posterior. Usually as nt. oraṁ the below, the near side, this world Sn.15; VvA.42 (orato Abl. from this side). -- Cases adverbially: Acc. oraṁ (with Abl.) on this side of, below, under, within M.II,142; Sn.804 (oraṁ vassasatā); Pv IV.3^3Q (oraṁ chahi māsehi in less than 6 months or after 6 months; id. p. at Pv.I,10¹² has uddhaṁ); PvA.154 (dahato); Instr. orena J. V.72; Abl. orato on this side Miln.210.

--pāra the below and the above, the lower & higher worlds Sn.1 (see SnA 13 = Nd² 422^b and cp. paroparaṁ); Miln.319 (samuddo anorapāro, boundless ocean). --pure (avarapure) below the fortress M.I,68 (bahinagare +). --mattaka belonging only to this world, mundane; hence: trifling, insignificant, little, evanescent Vin.II,85, 203 = It.85; D.I,3; M.I,449; A.IV,22; V,157, 164; Vbh.247; Nett 62; DhA.I,203; DA.I,55. (Page 169)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】此岸，这个世界。【形】次等的。orapāra,【中】上下，此岸彼岸。oramattaka,【形】些许的，无关紧要的。orambhāgiya,【形】下界(欲界)的。pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ (=pañcorambhāgiyasaṁyojanāni), 五下分结。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】此岸，这个世界。【形】次等的。 ~pāra, 【中】上下，此岸彼岸。 ~mattaka, 【形】些许的，无关紧要的。 ~mbhāgiya, 【形】低下世界的。Oraŋ, orena, 【副】在下，在内部，在这边。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Orabbhika: {'def': '[fr. urabbha. The Sk. aurabhrika is later & differs in meaning] one who kills sheep, a butcher (of sheep) M.I,343, 412; S.II,256; A.I,251; II,207 = Pug.56; III,303; Th.2, 242 (= urabbhaghātaka ThA.204); J.V,270; VI,111 (and their punishment in Niraya); Pug.A 244 (urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā; urabbhe hanatī ti orabbhiko). (Page 169)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】羊商，屠羊者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】羊商，屠羊者。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Oraka: {'def': '【形】次等的，低的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ora + ka] inferior, posterior Vin.I,19; II, 159; M.II,47; Sn.692 (= paritta SnA 489; cp. omaka); J.I,381. (Page 169)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】次等的，低的。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Oramati: {'def': '[denom. fr. ora instead of orameti] to stay or be on this side, i. e. to stand still, to get no further J.I,492 (oramituṁ na icchi), 498 (oramāma na pārema). Note. This form may also be expl^d. & taken as imper. of ava + ramati (cp. avarata 2), i. e. let us desist, let us give up, (i. e. we shall not get through to the other side). --anoramati (neg.) see sep. -- On the whole question see also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 154 sq. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Orambhāgiya: {'def': '(adj.) [ora + bhāga + iya; BSk. avarabhāgīya, e. g. Divy 533] being a share of the lower, i e. this world, belonging to the kāma world, Ep. of the 5 saṁyojanāni (see also saṁyojana) D.I,156; III,107, 108, 132; M.I,432; It.114; Pug.22; Nett 14; SnA 13; DA.I,313. -- Note. A curious form of this word is found at Th.2, 166 orambhāga-manīya, with gloss (ThA.158) oraṁ āgamanīya. Probably the bh should be deleted. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Orambhāgiya-saṁyojana: {'def': '﹐【中】下分结，系缚诸有情於下界(欲界)。断除首三下分结(身见结diṭṭhi-saṁyojanaṁ、戒禁取结sīlabbataparāmāsa- saṁyojanaṁ、疑结vicikiccha-saṁyojanaṁ)成为须陀洹果，断除五下分结(身见、戒禁取、疑、欲界贪、欲界瞋)成为阿那含果。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Oramāpeti: {'def': '(Caus. II. of oramati] to make someone desist from J.V,474 (manussa-maṁsā). (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Orasa: {'def': '【形】合法的，自我引起的。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Fr. ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa] belonging to one’s own breast, self-begotten, legitimate; innate, natural, own M.II,84; III,29; S.II,221 (Bhagavato putto o. mukhato jāto); III,83; J.III,272; Vv 50²²; ThA.236; KhA 248; PvA.62 (urejāta +). (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa),【形】属於自己的胸脯，合法的，自然的(belonging to one’s own breast, self-begotten, legitimate; innate, natural, own)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Orata: {'def': '[o + rata, pp. of ramati] -- 1. delighted, satisfied, pleased Miln.210 (cp. abhirata). -- 2. desisting, abstaining from, restraining oneself VvA.72 (= virato; cp. uparata). (Page 169)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oravitar: {'def': '[ora + n. ag. of vitarati?] doubtful reading at A.V,149, meaning concerned with worldly things (?). The vv. ll. are oramitā, oravikā, oramato, oravi. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oraṁ: {'def': 'orena,【副】在下，在内部，在这边。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Orima: {'def': '[superl. formation fr. ora, equivalent to avama] the lower or lowest, the one on this side, this (opp. yonder); only in comb^n. orima-tīra the shore on this side, the near shore (opp. pāra° and pārima° the far side) D.I,244; S.IV,175 (sakkāyass’adhivacanaṁ) = SnA 24; Dhs.597; Vism.512 (°tīra-mah’ogha); DhA.II,99. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】最低的，在这边的。orimatīra,【中】此岸。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】最低的，在这边的。~tīra,【中】此岸。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Orodha: {'def': '(‹orundhati; 梵avarodha),【阳】闺房(harem, seraglio)。rāj’orodhā﹐闺房淑女(harem-lady)，妾(concubine)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. orundhati; Sk. avarodha] obstruction; confinement, harem, seraglio Vin.II,290; IV,261 (rāj’orodhā harem-lady, concubine); J.IV,393, 404. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 闺房。 2. 闺房淑女。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Orohana: {'def': '【中】降落。参考 Oruhana。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 oruhana。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Orohati: {'def': '[o + rohati] to descend, climb down D.II,21; M.III,131; J.I,50; Miln.395; PvA.14. -- Caus. oropeti (q. v.). (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 oruhati。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '降落，下来。参考 Oruhati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Orohaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. orahati] descent, in udak’orohaṇânuyoga practice of descending in to the water (i. e. bathing) Pug.55; J.I,193; Miln.350. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oropana: {'def': '【中】拿下，放低，放下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】拿下，放低，放下。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Oropaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. oropeti] taking down, removal, cutting off (hair), in kes’oropaṇa hair-cutting DhA.II,53 (T. has at one place orohaṇa, v. l. oropaṇa). (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oropeti: {'def': '(ava+rup+e), 拿下，放低，搁置。oropesi,【过】。oropenta, oropayamāna,【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ava + rup + e), 拿下，放低，搁置。 oropesi, 【过】。 oropenta,oropayamāna, 【现分】。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. fr. orohati; BSk. avaropayati] to take down, bring down, deprive of, lay aside, take away, cut off (hair) VvA.64 (bhattabhājanaṁ oropeti) -- ger. oropayitvā Sn.44 (= nikkhipitvā paṭippassambhayitvā Nd² 181; apanetvā SnA 91); J.VI,211 (kesamassuṁ). (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oropetvā: {'def': '﹐Oropiya, (Oropeti的【独】), 放低了，搁置了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Oropita: {'def': '(Oropeti的【过分】) 拿下，放低，搁置。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Oruddha: {'def': '(Orundhati的【过分】) 阻隔，关押。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. orundhati. In meaning equalling Sk. aparuddha as well as ava°] -- 1. kept back, restrained, subdued A.III,393. -- 2. imprisoned J.IV,4. See also ava°. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oruhana: {'def': '【中】降落。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】降落。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Oruhati: {'def': '(ava+ruh上升+a), 降落，下来。oruhi,【过】。oruhanta,【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ava + ruh + a), 降落，下来。 oruhi, 【过】。 oruhanta, 【现分】。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Orundhati: {'def': '(ava + rudhi + ŋ-a), 阻隔，关押。 orundhi,【过】。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ava+rudh成长+ṁ-a), 阻隔，关押。orundhi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. avarundhate] to get, attain, take for a wife. -- ger. orundhiya J.IV,480. -- aor. oruddha Th.2, 445. -- pp. oruddha. See also avarundhati. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oruyha: {'def': '(Oruhati的【独】) 降落，下来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Orūḷha: {'def': '(oruhati 的【过分】), 已降落，已爬下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(oruhati 的【过分】), 已降落，已爬下。(p87)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Osadha: {'def': '【中】药。araññamosadha (arañña-m-osadha),森林里的药。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】药。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic auṣadha] see osadhī. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osadhi: {'def': 'Osadhī,【阴】药草。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osadhika: {'def': 'v. l. It.20 for opadhika. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osadhikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. osadha] remedy, esp. poultice, fomentation J.IV,361. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osadhitārakā: {'def': '(osadhi药+tārakā星)【阴】晨星(Venus金星，清晨东方最明亮的星星，亮度-4.4等)、药星(水野弘元译：太白星)。M.79./II,34.︰“Yvāyaṁ, bhante, rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ viddhe vigatavalāhake deve osadhitārakā-- ayaṁ imesaṁ ubhinnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā”ti. (世尊！这离夜晚破晓时，皎明无云天空的太白星，在这两者(与闇夜之大火聚相比)色光中为更美妙、更微妙。」)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osadhī: {'def': '【阴】药草，药王星（晨星）。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic avaṣa + dhī: bearer of balm, comfort, refreshment]. There is no difference in meaning between osadha and osadhī; both mean equally any medicine, whether of herbs or other ingredients. Cp. e. g. A.IV,100 (bījagāma-bhūtagāmā . . osadhi-tiṇavanappatayo) Pv.II,6¹⁰, with Sn.296 (gāvo . . . yāsu jāyanti osadhā); D.I,12, cp. DA.I,98; Pv III,5³; PvA.86; J.IV,31; VI,331 (? trsl^n. medicinal herb). Figuratively, “balm of salvation” (amatosadha) Miln.247. Osadhi-tārakā, star of healing. The only thing we know about this star is its white brilliance, S.I,65; It.20 = A.V,62; Vv 9²; Pv.II,1¹⁰; cp. PvA.71; Vism.412. Childers calls it Venus, but gives no evidence; other translators render it “morning star” . According to Hindu mythology the lord of medicine is the moon (oṣadhīśa), not any particular star. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osajjati: {'def': '[o + sṛj] to emit, evacuate PvA.268 (vaccaṁ excrement, + ohanati). -- pp. osaṭṭha. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osakkanā: {'def': '【阴】倒退，落在后面。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】倒退，落在后面。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osakkati: {'def': '(ava + sakk + a), 倒退，落在后面，撤退。 osakki, 【过】。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ava+sakk+a), 倒退，落在后面，撤退。osakki,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[o + sakkati fr. P. sakk = *Sk. ṣvaṣk, cp. Māgadhī osakkai; but sometimes confused with sṛp, cp. P. osappati & Sk. apasarpati] to draw back, move back D.I,230; J.IV,348 (for apavattati C.); V,295 (an-osakkitvā). See also Trenckner, Notes p. 60. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osakkita: {'def': '(osakkati 的【过分】)。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(osakkati 的【过分】) 倒退，落在后面，撤退。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osakkitvā: {'def': 'osakkiya,【独】撤退了，移过一边。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'osakkiya, 【独】撤退了，移过一边。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Osanna: {'def': '(adj.) [o + pp. of syad to move on] given out, exhausted, weak Miln.250 (°viriya). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osappati: {'def': '[o + sṛp to creep] to draw back, give way J.VI,190 (osappissati; gloss apīyati). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osaraka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. osarati, osarana & osaṭa] of the nature of a resort, fit for resorting to, over-hanging eaves, affording shelter Vin.II,153. See also osāraka. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osarati: {'def': '(ava + sar + a), 进入，再进入，集合。 osari, 【过】。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[o + sṛ] to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit M.I,176 (gāmaṁ etc.); II,122. -- pp. osaṭa. See also avasarati. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava(=o)+sar(梵sr)动转+a), 流动，离开，后退(to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit)。pp. osaṭa. see also avasarati.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osaraṇa: {'def': '(fr. avasarati),【中】1.进入(return to, going into (Acc.) visiting)。2. 抽离(withdrawal, distraction, drawing or moving away, heresy)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. avasarati] -- 1. return to, going into (Acc.) visiting J.I,154 (gāmantaṁ °kāle). -- 2. withdrawal, distraction, drawing or moving away, heresy Sn.538 (= ogahanāni titthāni, diṭṭhiyo ti attho SnA 434). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】进入，会议。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Osaṇheti: {'def': '[o + saṇheti, denom. fr. saṇha] to make smooth, to smooth out, comb or brush down (hair) Vin.II,107 (kese); J.IV,219 (id.). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osaṭa: {'def': '(osarati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of o + sṛ] having withdrawn to (Acc.), gone to or into, undergone, visited M.I,176, 469 (padasamācāro saṅgha-majjhe o.); II,2 (Rājagahaṁ vass°āvāsaṁ o.); Miln.24 (sākacchā osaṭā bahū). See also avasaṭa. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(osarati 的【过分】)。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Osita: {'def': '[pp. of ava + sā] inhabited (by), accessible (to) Sn.937 (an°). Cp. vy°. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ositta: {'def': '[pp. of osiñcati] sprinkled, besprinkled J.V,400. See also avasitta. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(osiñcati 的【过分】)。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(osiñcati 的【过分】) 倒下，洒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osiñcati: {'def': '(ava+sic倾倒+ṁ-a), 倒下，洒。osiñci,【过】。osiñcanta,【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ava + sic + ŋ-a), 倒下，洒。 osiñci, 【过】。 osiñcanta, 【现分】。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[o + siñcati] -- 1. to pour out or down over, to besprinkle Vin.II,262; M.I,87 (telena); Pv.I,8⁵ (ppr. osiñcaṁ = āsiñcanto PvA.41). -- 2. to scoop out, empty, drain (water) J.V,450 (osiñciyā, pot. = osiñceyya C.). ‹-› pp. avasitta & ositta. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osiñciya: {'def': 'osiñcitvā,【独】倒下了，洒了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'osiñcitvā, 【独】倒下了，洒了。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ossa: {'def': 'see ussa. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ossagga: {'def': '[fr. ossajati] relaxation, in cpd. sati-ossagga (for which more common sati-vossagga) relaxation of memory, inattention, thoughtlessness DhA.III,163 (for pamāda Dh.167). See vossagga. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ossajana: {'def': '【中】释放，解雇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】释放，解雇。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ossajati: {'def': '(ava + saj + a), 放出，放弃，释放。 ossaji, 【过】。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ava+saj (梵srj)+a), 放出，放弃，释放。ossaji,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ossajja: {'def': 'ossajjitvā, 【独】放弃了，释放了。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'ossajjitvā,【独】放弃了，释放了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ossajjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ossajati] release, dismissal, sending off DA.I,130. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ossajjati: {'def': '[o + sṛj send off] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release D.II,106 (aor. ossaji); Sn.270 = S.I,207; Th.1, 321; J.IV,260. -- pp. ossaṭṭha. See also avassajati. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ossakk°: {'def': 'see osakk°. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ossanna: {'def': '[pp. of osīdati for osanna, ss after ussanna] sunk, low down, deficient, lacking J.I,336 (opp. ussanna). Hardly to be derived from ava + syad. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ossavana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ava + sru] outflow, running water M.I,189 (v. l. ossāvana & osavana). Cp. avassava. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ossaṭṭha: {'def': '(ossajati 的【过分】)。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of ossajati] let loose, released, given up, thrown down D.II,106; S.III,241; J.I,64; IV,460 (= nissaṭṭha). (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ossajati 的【过分】)已放出，已放弃，已释放。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osāna: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. osāpeti] stopping, ceasing; end, finish, conclusion S.V,79 (read paṭikkamosāna), 177, 344; Sn.938 (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】结束，结论，停止。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. osāpeti),【中】结束，停，结论(stopping, ceasing; end, finish, conclusion)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osāpeti: {'def': '[With Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 158 Caus. of ava + sā, Sk. avasāyayati (cp. P. avaseti, oseti), but by MSS. & Pāli grammarians taken as Caus. of sṛ: sarāpeti contracted to sāpeti, thus ultimately the same as Sk. sārayati = P. sāreti (thus vv. ll.). Not with Trenckner, Notes 78 and Müller P. Gr. 42. Caus. of ā + viś to sling] to put forth, bring to an end, settle, put down, fix, decide S.I,81 (fut. osāpayissāmi; vv. ll. oyayiss° and obhāyiss° = Ud.66 (T. otarissāmi? vv. ll. obhāyiss°, otāy° & osāy°; C. paṭipajjissāmi karissāmi); J.I,25 (osāpeti, v. l. obhāseti); Nd¹ 412 (in expl^n. of osāna); VvA.77 (agghaṁ o. to fix a price; vv. ll. ohāpeti & onarāpeti) = DhA.III,108 (v. l. osāreti). Cp. osāreti. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osāraka: {'def': '[fr. osarati] shelter, outhouse J.III,446. See also osaraka. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osāraṇā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. osāreti 3] -- 1. restoration, rehabilitation reinstatement (of a bhikkhu after exclusion from the Saṅgha) Vin.I,322; Miln.344. -- 2. procession (?) (perhaps reading should be ussāraṇā) DhA.II,1 (T. oss°). (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】1.使复原，2.拥挤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 1. 使复原，2. 拥挤。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Osāreti: {'def': '[Caus. of o +sṛ to flow] -- 1. (with v. l. osāpeti, reading osāreti is uncertain) to stow away, deposit, put in, put away (see also opeti) J.VI,52, 67 (pattaṁ thavikāya o.). -- 2. to bring out, expound, propound, explain Miln.13 (abhidhammapiṭikaṁ), 203 (kāraṇaṁ), 349 (lekhaṁ to compose a letter). -- 3. (t.t.) to restore a bhikkhu who has undergone penance Vin.I,96, 322, 340; IV,53 (osārehi ayyā ti vuccamāno osāreti). -- Pass. osāriyati Vin.II,61; pp. osārita (cp. osāraṇā). (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava + sar + e), 恢复，解释。 osāresi, 【过】。 osārita, 【过分】。 osāretvā,【独】。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ava+sar(梵sr)动转+e), 恢复，复权，解释。osāresi,【过】。osārita,【过分】。osāretvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osārita: {'def': '[pp. of osāreti 3] restored, rehabilitated Vin.IV,138. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Osīdana: {'def': '【中】沉没。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. osīdati] sinking DhsA.363. (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹osīdati),【中】沉没(sinking)，下堕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osīdati: {'def': '(ava + sid + a), 下沉。 osīdi, 【过】。 osīdamāna, 【现分】。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. o + sad] to settle down, to sink, run aground (of ships) S.IV,314 (osīda bho sappi-tela); Miln.277 (nāvā osīdati). -- ger. osīditvā J.II,293. -- Caus. II. osīdāpeti J.IV,139 (nāvaṁ). (Page 172)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava+sid(梵sad)+a), 下沉。osīdi,【过】。osīdamāna,【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Osīdāpana: {'def': '【中】使下沉，浸渍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】使下沉，浸渍。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Osīdāpeti: {'def': '(osīdati 的【使】), 浸，使下沉。osīdāpesi,【过】。osīdāpita,【过分】。osīdāpetvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(osīdati 的【使】), 浸，使下沉。 osīdāpesi, 【过】。 osīdāpita, 【过分】。 osīdāpetvā, 【独】。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Otallaka: {'def': '(adj.) [of uncertain etym. perhaps *avatāryaka from ava + tṛ, or from uttāḷa?] clothed in rags, poor, indigent J.IV,380 (= lāmaka olamba-vilamba-nantakadharo C.). (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Otarati: {'def': '(o + tarati)(ava+tar+a), 降低，降下，放下(to descend, to go down to (c. Acc.), to be-take oneself to)。otari,【过】(for avaṁsari)。otaranta,【现分】。otaritvā,【独】。inf. otarituṁ。Caus.II. otarāpeti。【过分】otiṇṇa.。Caus. I. otāreti. Opp. uttarati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ava + tar + a), 降落，下去。 otari, 【过】。 otaranta, 【现分】。 otaritvā,【独】。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[o + tarati] to descend, to go down to (c. Acc.), to be-take oneself to. ppr. otaranto Vin.II,221. -- aor. otari SnA 486 (for avaṁsari); DhA.I,19 (caṅkamanaṁ); PvA.47 (nāvāya mahāsamuddaṁ), 75. -- inf. otarituṁ Pug.65, 75 (saṅgamaṁ). -- ger. otaritvā PvA.94 (pāsādā from the palace), 140 (devalokato). -- Caus. II. otarāpeti to cause to descend, to bring down to J.VI,345. -- pp. otiṇṇa. -- Caus. I. otāreti. Opp. uttarati. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Otaraṇa: {'def': '【中】降落，下来。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. otarati] going down, descending Nett 1, 2, 4, 107. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹otarati),【中】降落，下来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Otata: {'def': '[o + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with; Dh.162 (v. l. otthata); Miln.307 (+ vitata); DhA.III,153 (= pariyonandhitvā ṭhita). See also avatata & sam-otata. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Otiṇṇa: {'def': '(otarati 的【过分】), 已下降，已被困扰，已受影响。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Avatiṇṇa,(otarati 的【过分】), 已下降，已被困扰，已受影响(fallen into, affected with)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of otarati; the form ava° only found in poetry as --° e. g. issâvatiṇṇa J.V,98; dukkha°, soka° etc. see below 2] -- 1. (med.) gone down, descended PvA.104 (uddho-galaṁ na otiṇṇaṁ not gone down further than the throat). -- 2. (pass.) beset by (cp. avatāra 2), affected with, a victim of, approached by M.I,460 = A.II,123 (dukkh’otiṇṇa) = It.89 (as v. l.; T. has dukkhâbhikiṇṇa, which is either gloss or wrong reading for dukkhâvatiṇṇa); M.II,10; S.I,123 (sokâva°), 137 (id.); Sn.306 (icchâvatiṇṇa affected with desire), 939 (sallena otiṇṇo = pierced by an arrow, expl^d. by Nd¹ 414 as “sallena viddho phuṭṭho”); J.V,98 (issâva° = issāya otiṇṇa C.). -- 3. (in special sense) affected with love, enamoured, clinging to, fallen in love with Vin.III,128 (= sāratto apekkhavā paṭibaddha-citto); A.III,67, 259 (°citta); SnA 322 (id.). -- Note. otiṇṇa at S.V,162 should with v.l. SS be deleted. See also avatiṇṇa. (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ottappa: {'def': '(‹tappati1 + ud, would corresp. to a Sk. form *auttapya fr. ut-tapya to be regretted, tormented by remorse) ( ottappa‹na无+ava下﹑低+tapp折磨),【中】愧，怕造恶，忌孽(fear of exile, shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse)。hiri-ottappa(=hir-ottappa)惭愧。anottappa,无愧(lack of conscience, unscrupulousness, disregard of morality)。ottappagāravatā,尊重惭愧(respect for conscience)。ottappadhana惭愧宝(the treasure of (moral) self-control)。ottappabala﹐惭愧力(the power of a (good) conscience)。《阿毘达摩义广释》(Vibhv.p.85.)：sā pāpato jigucchanalakkhaṇā. Ottappatīti ottappaṁ, taṁ pāpato uttāsalakkhaṇaṁ. Atta-gārava-vasena pāpato jigucchanato kulavadhū viya hirī, para-gārava-vasena pāpato uttāsanato vesiyā viya ottappaṁ.(对恶有厌恶相。害怕邪恶名为‘愧’，对恶有恐惧相。处於尊重自己(自重)，避开恶，如族姓女(良家妇女)有惭；处於尊重他人，害怕恶，如妓女有愧(於所作罪，对他羞愧)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. tappati¹ + ud, would corresp. to a Sk. form *auttapya fr. ut-tapya to be regretted, tormented by remorse. The BSk. form is a wrong adaptation of the Pāli form, taking o° for apa°, viz. apatrapya M Vastu III, 53 and apatrapā ibid. I.463. Müller, P. Gr. & Fausböll, Sutta Nipāta Index were both misled by the BSk. form, as also recently Kern, Toev. s. v.] fear of exile, shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse. See on term and its distinction from hiri (shame) Dhs.trsl. 20, also DhsA.124, 126; Vism.8, 9 and the definition at SnA 181. Ottappa generally goes with hiri as one of the 7 noble treasures (see ariya-dhanā). Hiri-ottappa It.36; J.I,129; hir-ottappa at M.I,271; S.II,220; V,1; A.II,78; IV,99, 151; V,214; It.34; J.I,127, 206; VvA.23. See also hiri. -- Further passages: D.III,212; M.I,356; S.II,196, 206, 208; V,89; A.I,50, 83, 95; III,4 sq., 352; IV,11; V,123 sq.; Pug.71; Dhs.147, 277; Nett 39. -- anottappa (nt.) lack of conscience, unscrupulousness, disregard of morality A.I,50, 83, 95; III,421; V,146, 214; Vbh.341, 359, 370, 391; as adj. It.34 (ahirika +).

--gāravatā respect for conscience, A.III,331; IV,29. --dhana the treasure of (moral) self-control D.III,163, 251, 282; VvA.113. --bala the power of a (good) conscience D.III,253; Ps.II,169, 176; Dhs.31, 102 (trl^n. power of the fear of blame). (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】怕造恶，怕犯罪，惭愧，忌孽。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ottappati: {'def': '[ut + tappati¹] to feel a sense of guilt, to be conscious or afraid of evil S.I,154; Ps.II,169, 176; Pug.20, 21; Dhs.31; Miln.171. (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava + tap + ya), 罪行感，害怕邪恶，惭愧，忌孽。 ottappi, 【过】。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ava+tap(梵tap)热+ya), 罪行感，害怕邪恶，惭愧，忌孽。ottappi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ottappin: {'def': '& Ottāpin (adj.) [fr. ottappa] afraid of wrong, conscientious, scrupulous (a) ottappin D.III,252, 282; It.28, 119. -- (b) ottāpin M.I,43 sq.; S.II,159 sq., 196, 207; IV,243 sq.; A.II,13 sq.; III,3 sq., 112; IV,1 sq.; V,123, 146. Anottappin bold, reckless, unscrupulous Pug.20 (+ ahirika). anottāpin at S.II,159 sq., 195, 206; IV, 240 sq.; Sn.133 (ahirika +). (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ottappī: {'def': 'Ottāpī(Ottappin & Ottāpin),【形】害怕犯错的，小心谨慎的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'ottāpī, 【形】害怕犯错的，小心谨慎的。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ottharaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. of tharati] a kind of strainer, a filter Vin.II,119. (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ottharati: {'def': '(ava+thar+a﹐Sk. root str), 扩展，掩没( to spread over, spread out, cover)。otthari,【过】。ottharamāna,【现分】。ottharitvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[o + tharati, Sk. root str] to spread over, spread out, cover Miln.121 (opp. paṭikkamati, of water). See also avattharati. (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava + thar + a), 扩展，掩没。 otthari, 【过】。 ottharamāna, 【现分】。ottharitvā, 【独】。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ottharaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ottharati] spreading over, veiling Miln.299 (mahik°). (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】扩展，掩没。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】扩展，掩没。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Otthata: {'def': '= Otthaṭa, v. l. at Dh.162 for otata. (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Otthaṭa: {'def': '(ottharati 的【过分】)已扩展，已掩没。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ottharati 的【过分】)。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of ottharati] -- 1. spread over, veiled, hidden by (-°) Miln.299 (mahik° suriya the sun hidden by a fog). -- 2. strewn over (with) Sdhp.246 (-°). (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Otāpaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. otāpeti] drying or dried (in the sun), with ref. to food SnA 35 (parivāsika-bhattaṁ bhuñjati hatth’otāpakaṁ khādati). (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Otāpeti: {'def': '[o + tāpeti] to dry in the sun Vin.II,113; IV,281; Miln.371 (kummo udakato nikkhamitvā kāyaṁ o. fig. applied to mānasa). (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava+tap(梵tap)热+e)(o + tāpeti), 晒太阳(to dry in the sun)。otāpesi,【过】。otāpita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ava + tap + e), 向太阳揭露。 otāpesi, 【过】。 otāpita, 【过分】。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Otāra: {'def': '[fr. otarati, BSk. avatāra. The Sk. avatāra is centuries later and means “incarnation” ] -- 1. descent to, i. e. approach to, access, fig. chance, opportunity otāraṁ labhati. Only in the Māra myth.He, the tempter, “gets his chance” to tempt the Buddha or the disciples, M.I,334; S.I,122; IV,178, 185; DhA.III,121. (avatāraṁ labhati, Divy 144, 145) ot° adhigacchati, to find a chance, Sn.446. [Fausböll here translates “defect” . This is fair as exegesis. Every moral or intellectual defect gives the enemy a chance. But otāra does not mean defect]. Ot° gavesati to seek an opportunity, DhA.III,21. Otārāpekkha, watching for a chance, S.I,122. At one passage, A.III,67 = 259, it is said that constant association leads to agreement, agreement to trust, and trust to otāra. The Com. has nothing. “Carelessness” would suit the context. o. gavesati to look for an opportunity DhA.III,21, and otāraṁ labhati to get a chance S.I,122; IV,178, 185; M.I,334; DhA.III,21 (gloss okāra & okāsa); cp. avatāraṁ labhati Divy 144, 145 etc. -- 2. access, fig. inclination to, being at home with, approach, familiarity (cp. otiṇṇa and avacara adj.) A.III,67, 259. -- 3. (influenced by ocarati² and ociṇṇa) being after something, spying, finding out; hence: fault, blame, defect, flaw Sn.446 (= randha vivara SnA 393); also in phrase otārâpekkha spying faults S.I,122 (which may be taken to meaning 1, but meaning 3 is accredited by BSk. avatāraprekṣin Divy 322), Mrs. Rh. D. translates the latter passage by “watching for access”. (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹otarati, BSk. avatāra),【阳】1.降落。2.接近。otāragavesī,【形】寻求机会。otārāpekka,【形】守侯机会。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】降落，通路，机会，过失。 ~gavesī, 【形】寻求机会。 ~rāpekka,【形】守侯着机会。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Otāraṇa: {'def': '【中】降下。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹otarati),【中】降下(going down, descending)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Otāreti: {'def': '(ava + tar + e), 降低，降下。 otāresi, 【过】。 otārita, 【过分】。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ava+tar+e), 【使】降低，降下，放下。otāresi,【过】。otārita,【过分】。otāretvā﹐【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of otarati] to cause to come down, to bring down, take down J.I,426; IV,402; Nett 21, 22; DhA.II,81. (Page 166)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovadana: {'def': '【中】劝告。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】劝告。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ovadanta: {'def': 'ovadamāna,【现分】劝诫，劝告。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'ovadamāna, 【现分】劝诫，劝告。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ovadati: {'def': '[o + vadati. The Sk. avavadati is some centuries later and is diff. in meaning] to give advice, to admonish, exhort, instruct, usually comb^d. with anusāsati. -- pres. ovadati Vin.IV,52 sq.; DhA.I,11, 13; imper. ovadatu M.III,267. -- pot. ovadeyya Vin.IV,52 (= aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadati); Sn.1051 (= anusāseyya). -- aor. ovadi DhA.I,397. -- inf. ovadituṁ Vin.I,59 (+ anusāsituṁ). -- grd. ovaditabba Vin.II,5; and ovadiya (see sep.). -- Pass. avadiyati; ppr. °iyamāna Pug.64 (+ anusāsiyamāna). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava+vad说+a), 忠告，劝告。ovadi,【过】。ovadita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ava + vad + a), 忠告，劝告。 ovadi, 【过】。 ovadita, 【过分】。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ovaddheyya: {'def': 'a process to be carried out with the kaṭhina robes. The meaning is obscure Vin.I,254. See the note at Vin. Texts II.154; Vin.I,254 is not clear (see expl^n. by C. on p. 388). The vv. ll. are ovadeyya° ovadheyya° ovaṭṭheyya°. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovaditabba: {'def': '【义】应该劝告。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【潜】应该劝告。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ovaditvā: {'def': 'ovadiya,【独】劝诫了，劝告了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'ovadiya, 【独】劝诫了，劝告了。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ovadiya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of ovadati] who or what can be advised, advisable Vin.I,59 (+ anusāsiya); Vv 84³⁶ (= ovāda-vasena vattabbaṁ VvA.345). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovahati: {'def': '[o + vahati] to carry down. -- Pass. ovuyhati It.114 (ind. & pot. ovuyheyya). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovaja: {'def': 'at S.I,212 read ojava. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovajjamāna: {'def': '【现分】被劝告，被训诫，被警告。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【现分】被劝告，被训诫，被警告。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ovamati: {'def': '[o + vam] to throw up, vomit Ud.78. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovaraka: {'def': '【阳】内室。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】内室。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Deriv. uncertain. The Sk. apavaraka is some centuries later. The Sk. apavaraka forbidden or secret room, Halāyudha “lying-in chamber”] an inner room Vin.I,217; M.I,253; J.I,391 (jāto varake T. to be read as jāt’ovarake i. e. the inner chamber where he was born, thus also at VvA.158); Vism.90, 431; VvA.304 (= gabbha). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovariya: {'def': 'ovariyāna, (ovarati 的【独】), 抑制，防止。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'ovariyāna, (ovarati 的【独】), 抑制，防止。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ovariyāna: {'def': '[ger. of o + vṛ] forbidding, obstructing, holding back, preventing Th.2, 367 (v. l. ovadiyāna, thus also ThA.250 explained “maṁ gacchantiṁ avaditvā gamanaṁ nisedhetvā”). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovassa: {'def': '& °ka see anovassa(ka). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovassati: {'def': '(ava + vas + a), 下雨。 ovassi, 【过】。 ovaṭṭha, 【过分】。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[o + vassati] to rain down on, to make wet. ‹-› Pass. ovassati to become wet through rain Vin.II,121. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ava+vas住+a), 下雨。ovassi,【过】。ovaṭṭha,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ovassāpeti: {'def': '(Ovassati的【使】), 用雨淋湿。ovassāpesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ovaṭa: {'def': '[o + vaṭa, pp. of vṛ, another form of ovuta = ophuta, q. v.] obstructed, prevented Vin.II,255 = IV.52 = A.IV,277 (v. l. ovāda); also an° ibid. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovaṭṭika: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ava + vṛt] -- 1. girdle, waistband M.II,47; J.III,285 (v. l. ovaddhi°); Vism.312; DhA.II,37; IV,206; DA.I,218 (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156: a kind of bag). -- 2. a bracelet Vin.II,106 (= vaḷayaṁ C.). ‹-› 3. a patch, patching (°karaṇa), darning (?) Vin.I,254 (vv. ll. ovaṭṭiya°, ovadhita° ovadhīya°); J.II,197 (v. l. ovaddhi°). See also ovaddheyya (ava°). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovaṭṭikā: {'def': '【阴】腰带，(有腰带的)小袋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】腰带，（有腰带的）小袋。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ovijjhati: {'def': '[ava + vyadh] to pierce through Vism.304. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovuta: {'def': 'see ophuta. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐ophuta (ava+vuta﹐apāruta)﹐【形】覆障的。【过分】已覆障。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ovuyhati: {'def': '[Pass. of ovahati] to be carried down (a river) It.114. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovāda: {'def': '[BSk. avavāda in same sense as P.] advice, instruction, admonition, exhortation Vin.I,50 = II.228; II,255 = IV.52; D.I,137 (°paṭikara, function of a king); J.III,256 (anovādakara one who cannot be helped by advice, cp. ovadaka); Nett 91, 92; DhA.I,13, 398 (dasavidha o.); VvA.345. -- ovādaṁ deti to give advice PvA.11, 12, 15, (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】忠告，教诫(教导还没发生的事︰「要这样做，不要这样做。」之后反复的教导为教授(anusāsani))。ovādaka, ovādāyaka,【形】劝告人，劝诫者。ovādakkhama,【形】易劝的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】忠告，劝告，指令。 ~ka, ~dāyaka, 【形】劝告人，劝诫者。 ~kkhama, 【形】易劝的。(p88)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ovādaka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. ovāda; cp. BSk. avavādaka in same meaning, e. g. Divy 48, 254, 385] admonishing (act.) or being admonished (pass.); giving or taking advice; a spiritual instructor or adviser M.I,145; A.I,25; S.V,67 = It.107. -- anovādaka one who cannot or does not want to be advised, incorrigible J.I,159; III,256, 304; V,314. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ovādin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. ovāda] = ovādaka M.I,360 (anovādin). (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oyācati: {'def': '[o + yāc, opp. āyācati] to wish ill, to curse, imprecate Vin.III,137. (Page 169)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oñāta: {'def': '[pp. o + jānāti, see also avañāta] despised Miln.191, 229, 288. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oḍḍeti: {'def': '(uḍ + e), 置下陷阱，悬挂。 oḍḍesi, 【过】。 oḍḍita, 【过分】。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[for uḍḍeti (?). See further under uḍḍeti] to throw out (a net), to lay snares A.I,33 = J.II,37, 153; III,184 and passim; ThA.243. -- pp. oḍḍita (q. v.). (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(uḍ+e), 设下陷阱，悬挂( to throw out (a net), to lay snares)。oḍḍesi,【过】。oḍḍita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Oḍḍha: {'def': '[better spelling oḍha, pp. of ā + vah] carried away, appropriated, only in cpd. sah-oḍhā corā thieves with their plunder Vism.180 (cp. Sk. sahoḍha Manu IX.270). (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oḍḍita: {'def': '[pp. of oḍḍeti] thrown out, laid (of a snare) J.I, 183; II,443; V,341; ThA.243. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oḷumpika: {'def': '(adj.) [Deriv. unknown, BSk. olumpika and oḍumpika M Vastu III,113, 443. In the Śvet-Upan. we find the form uḍupa a skiff.] Sen. Kacc 390 belonging to a skiff (no ref. in Pāli Canon?); cp. BSk. olumpika M Vastu III, 113 & oḍumpika ibid. 443. (Page 171)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oḷāra: {'def': 'at PvA.110 is with v. l. BB to be read uḷāra. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oḷārika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. uḷāra] gross, coarse, material, ample (see on term Dhs.trsl. 208 & Cpd. 159 n. 4) D.I,37, 186 sq. (attā) 195, 197, 199; M.I,48, 139, 247; II,230; III,16, 299; S.II,275 (vihāra); III,47 (opp. sukhuma); IV,382 (id.); V,259 sq.; A.IV,309 sq. (nimittaṁ obhāso); J.I,67; Dhs.585, 675, 889; Vbh.1, 13, 379; Vism.155 (°aṅga), 274 sq. (with ref. to breathing), 450. (Page 170)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】毛重的，粗糙的，充足的。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. uḷāra),【形】毛重的，粗糙的，充足的(gross, coarse, material, ample)。Vbh.2.︰5.Tattha katamaṁ rūpaṁ oḷārikaṁ? Cakkhāyatanaṁ …pe… phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṁ--idaṁ vuccati rūpaṁ oḷārikaṁ.(在此，什么是‘粗色’？眼处(眼净色)、耳处(耳净色)、鼻处(鼻净色)、舌处(舌净色)、身处(身净色)、触色(地、火、风)、颜色、声、香、味，这称为粗色。) Tattha katamaṁ rūpaṁ sukhumaṁ? Itthindriyaṁ …pe… kabaḷīkāro (kabaḷiṁkāro) āhāro--idaṁ vuccati rūpaṁ sukhumaṁ.(在此，什么是‘细色’？女根色、男根色、心色、命根色、食色、水、限界色、身表色、语表色、色轻快性、色柔软性、色适应性、色积聚、色相续性、色老性、色无常性，这称为细色。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Oṇamana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. oṇamati] bending down, inclining, bowing down to Miln.234. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oṇamati: {'def': '[o + namati] (Instr.) to incline, bend down to, bow to (Dat.) Miln.220, 234 (oṇamati & oṇamissati), 400; DA.I,112. Caus. oṇāmeti M.II,137 (kāyaṁ). -- pp. oṇata & Caus. oṇamita. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oṇamita: {'def': '[pp. of oṇameti, Caus. of nam] having bowed down, bowing down Miln.234. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oṇata: {'def': '[pp. of oṇamati] bent down, low, inclined. Usually of social rank or grade, comb^d. with & opp. to uṇṇata, i. e. raised & degraded, lofty and low A.II,86 = Pug.52 (= nīca lāmaka Pug.A 229); Pv IV.6^Q; Miln.387; DA.I,45; PvA.29. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oṇi: {'def': '(m. or f.) [cp. Vedic oṇi charge, or a kind of Soma vessel] charge, only in cpd. oṇi-rakkha a keeper of entrusted wares, bailee Vin.III,47, 53 (= āhaṭaṁ bhaṇḍaṁ gopento). (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oṇojana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. oṇojeti, Sk. avanejana] washing off, cleaning, washing one’s hands Vin.II,31 (Bdhgh. refers it to fig. meaning onojeti² by explaining as “vissajjana” gift, presentation). (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oṇojeti: {'def': '(with vowel assimilation o ‹ e for oṇejeti = ava + nejeti, Sk. °nejayati fr. nij. Kern, Toev. II.138, complementary to remarks s. v. on p. 5 expl^ns. as assimil. onuj° ‹ onij°, like anu° BSk. ani° (ānisaṁsa ‹ ānuśaṁsā), the further process being onoj° for onuj°. The etym. remains however doubtful) -- 1. to cause to wash off, to wash, cleanse: see oṇojana. -- 2. (fig.) to give as a present, dedicate (with the rite of washing one’s hands, i. e. a clean gift) Vin.I,39; IV,156; A.IV,210 = 214 (oṇojesi aor.); Miln.236. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oṇīta: {'def': 'see onīta. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Oṭṭha: {'def': '1 (Vedic osṭha；Sk. āh)﹐唇(the lip)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic oṣṭha, idg. *ō (u) s; Av. aosta lip; Lat. ōs mouth = Sk. āḥ Ags. ōr margin] the lip A.IV,131; Sn.608; J.II,264; III,26 (adhar° & uttar° lower & upper lip), 278; V,156; DhA.I,212; III,163; IV,1; VvA.11; PvA.260. Cp. bimboṭṭha. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(Vedic usṭra, f. usṭrī),【阳】骆驼(Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 150 suggests elephant)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Vedic uṣṭra, f. uṣṭrī, buffalo = Ohg. Ags. ur, Lat. urus bison, aurochs. In cl. Sk. it means a camel]. It is mentioned in two lists of domestic animals, Vin.III,52; Miln.32. At J.III,385 a story is told of an oṭṭhī-vyādhi who fought gallantly in the wars, and was afterwards used to drag a dung-cart. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 150 suggests elephant. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 骆驼。 2. 唇。(p85)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Oṭṭhubhati: {'def': '[cp. Sk. avaṣṭhīvati] to spit out M.I,79, 127. (Page 165)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

P: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十一个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 b。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十一个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 b。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pa-: {'def': '(梵pra-)﹐【字首】1.出。2.在前。3.彻底。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabala: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. prabala] very strong, mighty Sdhp.75. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有势力的，强大的。mighty.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabandha: {'def': '【阳】连续性(continuity)，论文、诗(a treatise or poem)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (°-) [pa+bandha] continuous Vism.32. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabba: {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. parvan] 1. a knot (of a stalk), joint, section Vin.IV,35; M.I,80; J.I,245 (veḷu°); Vism.358 (id.; but nāḷika p. 260); VbhA.63 (id.); Th.1, 243. -- aṅgula° finger joint Vin.IV,262, M.I,187; DA.I,285. -- pabba-pabbaṁ knot for knot DhsA.11. -- 2. the elbow S.IV,171. -- 3. section, division, part Vism.240 (14 sections of contemplation of the body or kāyagatāsati); VbhA.275, 286.

--gaṇṭhi a knot Miln.103. --valli a species of Dūrvā J.V,69; --vāta intermittent ague Vin.I,205. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】茎的节，关节，区段，区分。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabbaja: {'def': '[Sk. balbaja, cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 39. 6] a species of reed. bulrush Vin.I,190 (T. reads babbaja); S.I,77; II.92; III,137 (v. l. babbaja), 155 (°lāyaka); Th.1, 27; J.II,140, 141; V,202; VI,508. For further refs. see babbaja. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐babbaja(Sk. balbaja), 芦苇、香蒲(bulrush)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabbajana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pabbajati] going into an ascetic life J.III,393 (a°). (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【中】Pabbajjā﹐【阴】出家(taking up of the ascetic life; become a monk)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabbajati: {'def': '[cp. Sk. pravrajati, pra+vraj] to go forth, to leave home and wander about as a mendicant, to give up the world, to take up the ascetic life (as bhikkhu, samaṇa, tapassin, isi etc.). S.I,140, 141; Sn.157, 1003; imper. pabbaja DhA.I,133. Pot. pabbajeyya J.I,56; Pug.57. -- Fut. pabbajissati Sn.564; DhA.I,133; IV,55. Aor. pabbaji M.III,33; S.I,196=Th.1, 1255; Sn.405; Vv 82⁶; PvA.76; ger. pabbajitvā J.I,303; PvA.21 and °vāna Sn.407. -- (agārasmā) anagāriyaṁ pabbajati to go forth into the homeless state Vin.III,12; M.III,33; S.I,196; A.V,204; Pv.II,13¹⁶. sāsane p. to become an ascetic in (Buddhas) religion, to embrace the religion (& practice) of the Buddha J.I,56; PvA.12. pabbajjaṁ pabbajati to go into the holy life (of an ascetic friar, wanderer etc.): see pabbajjā. -- Caus. pabbājeti (q. v.). -- pp. pabbajita. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+vaj(vraj)继续进行+a)(Sk. pravrajati)﹐向前去(goes forth)，出家(becomes a monk; leaves household life)。【过】pabbaji。【过分】pabbajita。【独】pabbajitvā。【现分】pabbajanta。agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, 离家为了出家(的生活)(而)出家，古译：家非家出家(to go forth into the homeless state)(agārasmā(Abl.) 离俗家+anagāriya(Dat.)为了出家+ pabbajjaṁ(Acc.)出家。(p)pa-(v)vaj› pabbajati。)。imper. pabbaja. Pot. pabbajeyya. -- Fut. pabbajissati. Aor. pabbaji; ger. pabbajitvā. --. Caus. pabbājeti. -- pp. pabbajita.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabbajita: {'def': '﹐【阳】出家人(a monk)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pabbajati, cp. BSk. pravrājita Divy 236] one who has gone out from home, one who has given up worldly life & undertaken the life of a bhikkhu recluse or ascetic, (one) ordained (as a Buddhist friar), gone forth (into the holy life or pabbajjā) Vin.III,40 (vuḍḍha-pabbajito bhikkhu); IV,159; D.I,131 (agārasmā anagāriyaṁ p.), 157; III,31 sq., 147 sq.; M.I,200, 267, 345, 459; II,66, 181; III,261; S.I,119 (dhammavinaye p.); IV,260, 330; V,118 sq., 421; A.I,69, 107, 147, 168; II,78, 143; III,33, 78 (vuḍḍha°), 244, 403 (acira°); IV,21 (cira°); V,82, 348 sq.; Sn.43 (see Nd² 397), 274, 385, 423; Dh.74, 174, 388; J.I,56; Pv.II,8¹ (=samaṇa PvA.106); II,11¹ (bhikkhu=kāmādimalānaṁ pabbajitattā paramatthato pabbajito PvA.146); II,13¹⁷ (=pabbajjaṁ upagata PvA.167); Miln.11; DA.I,270; DhA.I,133; PvA.5, 55. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabbajjā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pa+vraj, cp. pabbajati, Epic & BSk. pravrajyā] leaving the world, adopting the ascetic life; state of being a Buddhist friar, taking the (yellow) robe, ordination. -- (1) ordination or admission into the Buddha’s Order in particular: Vin.III,13; S.I,161 etc. -- sāmanera° ordination of a Novice, described in full at Vin.I,82. -- pabbajjaṁ yācati to beg admission Vin.IV,129; labhati to gain admission to the Order Vin.I,12, 17, 32; D.I,176; S.IV,181. -- (2) ascetic or homeless life in general D.III,147 sq.; M.III,33 (abbhokāso p.); S.V,350 (id.; read pabbajjā); A.V,204 (id.); S.II,128 (read °jjā for °jā); IV,260; A.I,151, 168; IV,274 sq.; Sn.405, 406, 567; It.75 (pabbajjāya ceteti); Miln.19 (dhamma-cariya-samacariy’atthā p.); DhA.I,6; SnA 49, 327, 423; ThA.251. -- pabbajjaṁ upagata gone into the homeless state PvA.167 (for pabbajita); agārasmā anagāriyaṁ p. the going forth from home into the homeless state Vin.II,253; M.II,56; pabbajjaṁ pabbajati to undertake or go into the ascetic life, in foll. varieties: isi° of a Saint or Sage J.I,298, 303; DhA.IV,55; PvA.162 (of the Buddha); tāpasa° of a Hermit J.III,119; DA.I,270 (described in detail); DhA.IV,29; PvA.21; samaṇa° of a Wanderer PvA.76. ‹-› Note. The ceremony of admission to the priesthood is called pabbajjā (or pabbajana), if viewed as the act of the candidate of orders, and pabbājana (q. v.), if viewed as the act of the priest conferring orders; the latter term however does not occur in this meaning in the Canon. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '出家;出家生活', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Pabbaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pabba] forming a division or section, consisting of, belonging to KhA 114 (khaya°) (?). (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabbata: {'def': '[Vedic parvata, fr. parvan, orig. knotty, rugged, massive] (1) a mountain (-range), hill, rock S.I,101, 102, 127, 137; II,32, 185, 190; A.I,243; II,140; IV,102 (dhūpāyati); Sn.413, 417, 543, 958, 1014; Nd¹ 466; Dh.8, 127 (°ānaṁ vivaro)=PvA.104; Dh.188 (n. pl. °āni), 304; DA.I,209; Miln.346 (dhamma°); PvA.221 (aṅgāra°) Sdhp.352, 545, 574. -- The 7 mountains round Veḷuvana are enum^d at J.V,38. -- Names of some (real or fictitious) mountains, as found in the Jātaka literature: Cakkavāḷa J.VI,282; Caṇḍoraṇa J.IV,90; Canda J.IV,283; V,38, 162; Daṇḍaka-hirañña J.II,33; Daddara J.II,8; III,16; Nemindhara J.VI,125; Neru J.III,247; V,425; Paṇḍava Sn.417; SnA 382 sq.; Mahāneru J.IV,462; Mahindhara Vv 32¹⁰ (cp. VvA.136); Meru J.I,25; IV,498; Yugandhara PvA.137; Rajata J.I,50; Vipula J.VI,518; Sineru S.II,139; J.I,48 & passim; Suvaṇṇa J.I,50; VI,514 (°giritāla). -- (2) [cp. Sk. pārvata mountainous] a mountaineer Miln.191.

--utu the time (aspect) of the mountain (in prognostications as to horoscope) DhA.I,165 (megha-utu, p.‹-› utu, aruṇa-utu). --kaccha a mountain meadow (opp. nadī-kaccḥa) SnA 33. --kandara a m. cave S.II,32; V,396, 457 sq.; A.V,114 sq.; --kūṭa m. peak Vin.II,193; J.I,73. --gahaṇa m. thicket or jungle PvA.5. --ṭṭha standing on a m. Dh.28. --pāda the foot of a m. J.III,51; DhA.IV,187; PvA.10. --muddhā mountain top Vin.I,5. --raṭṭha m.-kingdom SnA 26. --rājā “king of the mountain,” Ep. of Himavā S.I,116; II,137 sq., 276; III,149; V,47, 63, 148; A.I,152; III,240; IV,102; PvA.143. --saṅkhepa top of a m. D.I,84 (=p. --matthaka DA.I,226). --sānu m.-glen Vv 32¹⁰ (cp. VvA.136). --sikhara mountain-crest J.V,421. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【阳】山，岩石。pabbatakūṭa﹐【中】山顶。pabbatagahana﹐【中】山区。pabbataṭṭha,【形】位於山上的。pabbatapāda,【阳】山脚。pabbatasikhara,【中】山顶。pabbateyya,【形】经常在山上走动的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabbataka: {'def': '[fr. pabbata] a mountain J.I,303. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabbateyya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pabbata] belonging to mountains, mountain-born (of a river) A.III,64 (nadī p°ā sīghasotā hārahārinī); IV,137 (id.); Vism.231 (id.), 285 (nadī). (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabbedha: {'def': '[pa+vedha of vyadh, cp. BSk. pravedha in same phrase at Divy 56, viz. ṣoḍaśa-pravedho] piercing through (measuring) an arrow shot Th.1, 164 -- J.II,334 (soḷasa°=soḷasa-kaṇḍa-pāta-vitthāro C.). -- Note. pabbedha owes its bb to analogy with ubbedha. It also corresponds to the latter in meaning: whereas ubbedha refers to the height, pabbedha is applied to the breadth or width. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabbhamati: {'def': '[pa+bhamati] to roam forth or about J.V,106 (=bhamati C.). (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabbhāra: {'def': '[cp. BSk. prāg-bhāra Divy 80 etc.] 1. (m.) a decline, incline, slope J.I,348; adj. (usually --°) bending, inclining, sloping; fig. tending or leading to (cp. E. “bearing on”) M.I,493 (samudda°); S.I,110 (id.); V,38, 216, 219; A.IV,198 (anupubba°), 224 (viveka°); Miln.38 (samādhi°). Very frequent in combⁿ with similar expressions, e. g. ninna, poṇa (cp. PvA.ninnapoṇa-pabbhāraṁ cittaṁ): see further ref. under ninna; with adhimutta & garuka at Vism.117 (Nibbāna°). -- apabbhara (sic.) not slanting or sloping J.V,405 (=samatittha C.). -- 2. (m. & nt.) a cave in a mountain Miln.151; J.V,440; DhA.II,59 (nt.), 98.

--ṭṭhāna a slope J.I,348; DhsA.261. --dasaka the decade (period) of decline (in life), which in the enum° of the 10 decades (vassadasā) at J.IV,397 is given as the seventh. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】山坡。【形】倾斜的，有坡度的，导向的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabbājana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+Caus. of vraj, see pabbajati & pabbājeti] keeping out or away, removing, banishment, exiling D.I,135; III,93; Miln.357; Dh.I,296 (=nīharaṇa); DhA.IV,145. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【中】放逐(exile)，驱逐(banishment)。pabbājaniya,【形】该被驱逐的，该被流放的(deserving to be expelled or exiled)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabbājaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pabbājana] belonging to banishment, deserving to be exiled Miln.186; also in cpd. °kamma excommunication, one of the 5 ecclesiastical acts enum^d at Vin.I,49, 143. See also A.I,79; DhA.II,109. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabbājeti: {'def': '[Caus. of pabbajati] 1. to make go out or away, drive out, banish, exile D.I,92 (raṭṭhasmā out of the kingdom;=nīharati DA.I,258); M.II,122; Dh.388 (attano malaṁ pabbājayaṁ, tasmā pabbajito ti vuccati); DhA.IV,145 (expl^ns as “attano rāgādimalaṁ pabbājento vinodento”) J.I,262 (raṭṭhā); III,168 (id.); VI,350, 351; DhA.II,41; PvA.54 (core). -- 2. to make go forth (into the homeless state), to make somebody take up the life of an ascetic or a bhikkhu, to take into the (Buddha’s) order, to ordain Vin.I,82 (description of ordination of a novice), 97; III,12; IV,129; DhA.I,19, 133. -- pp. pabbājita (q. v.). (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabbājita: {'def': '[pp. of pabbājeti] taken into the order, made a bhikkhu M.II,62. (Page 414)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabbājitattā: {'def': '出家的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabha: {'def': '【阴】光，光辉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'is adj. form (-°) of pabhā (q. v.). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhagga: {'def': '﹐(pabhañjati的【过分】) 已打碎，已破坏，已击败。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pabhañjati, cp. Sk prabhagna] broken up, destroyed, defeated Vin.III,108. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhassara: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. bhās] shining, very bright, resplendent S.I,145; V,92, 283; A.I,10, 254, 257 sq., III,16; Sn.48 (=parisuddha pariyodāta Nd² 402); J.V,202, 170; Vv 17¹ (rucira+); Pv III,3¹ (rucira+); Vism.223; 377; DhA.I,28; VvA.12 (pakati° bright by nature). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'm. 光音 [天] , 極光淨 [天].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '﹐【形】非常明亮的，辉煌的(resplendent)。A.I,258 .佛陀有谈到心有明亮的光pabhassara极光净)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. 光音 [天] , 極光浄 [天].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Pabhassati: {'def': '[pa+bhraṁś; cp. Sk. prabhraśyate] to fall down or off, drop, disappear Vin.II,135 (pret. pabhassittha); IV,159 (id.). -- Cp. pabhaṁsana. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhava: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [fr. pa+bhu, cp. Ved. prabhava] production, origin, source, cause M.I,67; S.I,181; II,12; It.37 (āhāra-netti°); Sn.728, 1050; Nd² under mūla (with syn. of sambhava & samuṭṭhāna etc.); J.III,402= VI,518. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+bhū),【阳】起源(origin)，来源(source)。【形】(在【合】中)有如起源。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabhavati: {'def': '(pa+bhū+a), 流下，发生。flows down; originates.【过】pabhavi。【过分】生命。【独】pabhavitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see pahoti. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhañjati: {'def': '[pa+bhañj] to break up, destroy J.IV,494. ‹-› pp. pabhagga (q. v.). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhaṁsana: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. pa+bhraṁś, cp. nāva-prabhraṁśana Npl. A.V,] causing to fall or disappear, depriving, taking away, theft, in maṇi° jewel-theft J.VI,383. (Rh. D. “polishing”?) Kern in Toev. s. v. takes pabhaṁsana as a der. fr. pa+bhrās to shine, i. e. making bright, polishing (as Rh. D.). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhaṅga: {'def': '[fr. pa+bhañj] destruction, breaking up, brittleness Ps.II,238 (calato pabhaṅgato addhuvato); but id. p. at Nd² 214^II and Miln.418 read “calato pabhaṅguto addhuvato.” Pabhaṅgu, Pabhaṅguṇa & °gura (adj.) [fr. pa+bhanj, cp. BSk. prabhaṅguṇatā destruction, perishableness MVastu III,338] brittle, easily destroyed, perishable, frail. (a) pabhaṅgu: S.III,32; V,92; A.I,254, 257 sq.; III,16; DhsA.380; Sdhp.51, 553. -- (b) °guṇa: It.37; J.I,393 (ittarā addhuvā pabhaṅguno calitā; reading may be pabhaṅguṇā); Dh.139 (as n.;=pabhaṅgubhāva, pūtibhāva, DhA.III,71), 148 (=pūtikāya ibid. 111). -- (c) °gura Dh.148 (v. l.); ThA.95; Sdhp.562, 605. -- See also pabhaṅga. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhaṅgu: {'def': 'pabhaṅgura【形】易碎的，脆弱的，易腐坏的。brittle; frail; perishable.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabhaṅkara: {'def': '(pabhā-光、光芒+kara制造、带来)﹐【阳】带光来者，即：太阳。one who makes light, one who light up, light-bringer, i.e.the sun.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pabhaṁ, Acc. of pabhā,+kara] one who makes light, one who lights up, light-bringer (often as Ep. of the Buddha) S.I,51 (quoted at VvA.116), 210; A.II,51 sq.; It.80; J.III,128; Sn.991, 1136 (=ālokakara obhāsakara etc. Nd² 399); Vv 21⁴ (=ñāṇ’obhāsa-kara VvA.106); 34²⁵ (=lokassa ñāṇ’āloka-kara VvA.115). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabheda: {'def': '【阳】多样性，劈开。pabhedana,【中】分开，瓦解，分泌。【形】毁灭性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+bhid, cp. pabhindati] breaking or splitting up, breaking, opening VvA.183; akkhara° breaking up of letters, word-analysis, phonology D.I,88 (=sikkhā ca nirutti ca DA.I,247=SnA 447). -- adj. (-°) breaking up into, i. e. consisting of, comprising, of various kinds J.I,84; PvA.8 (paṭisandhi-ādi°), 130 (saviññāṇak’âviññāṇaka°). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhedana: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. pabheda] breaking up, destruction Sn.1105 (avijjāya°=bhedanaṁ pahānaṁ etc. Nd² 403). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhijjana: {'def': '【中】分离，分裂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabhijjati: {'def': '(pa+bhid打破+ya)，被打破，爆裂开。【过】pabhijji。【现分】pabhijjamāna。【独】pabhijjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabhindati: {'def': '[pa+bhindati] to split asunder (trs.), break, destroy Sn.973 (=bhindati sambhindati Nd¹ 503); ger. pabhijja S.I,193=Th.1, 1242. -- Pass. pabhijjati to be broken, to burst (open), to split asunder (intrs.), to open S.I,150 (aor. pabhijjiṁsu); Sn.p. 125 (id.); Vv 41³ (break forth=pabhedaṁ gacchanti VvA.183; gloss pavajjare for pabhijjare); SnA 475 (=bhijjati). Also “to open, to be developed” (like a flower) Miln.93 (buddhi p.). -- pp. pabhinna. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhinna: {'def': '[pp. of pabhindati] 1. to burst open, broken (like a flower or fruit), flowing with juice; usually appl^d to an elephant in rut, mad, furious M.I,236 (hatthi°); Dh.326 (hatthi°=mattahatthi DhA.IV,24)= Th.1, 77; J.IV,494; VI,488; Pv.I,11² (read chinnapabhinna-gatta); Miln.261, 312 (hatthināgaṁ tidhāpabhinnaṁ); DA.I,37 (°madaṁ caṇḍa-hatthiṁ). -- 2. developed, growing Miln.90 (°buddhi). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pabhijjati的【过分】) 1.已打破。2.已分开。3.已爆发。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabhoti: {'def': 'etc. see pahoti. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhu: {'def': '[fr. pa+bhū] iord, master, ruler, owner DA.I,250. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhuti: {'def': '﹐【无】从…开始，自…以后，后来。(ind.) beginning from; since; subsequently.(Tato pabhuti= 从那时thence forth)。pabhutika,【形】自…时代存在至今，得自，来自。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [Vedic prabhṛti] beginning, in meaning of: since, after, subsequently; tato p. from that time, henceforth VvA.158. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhutika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pabhuti] dating from, derived or coming from (Abl.) D.I,94 (kuto p.). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pa+bhā, cp. Epic Sk. prabhā] light, radiance, shine A.II,139; V,22; It.19, 20; PvA.56 (sarīra°), 137 (id.), 71, 176; Sdhp.250. -- canda-ppabhā moonshine It.20; DhsA.14. -- adj. pabha (-°), radiating, lucid, in cpd. sayam° self-lucid or self-radiant D.I,17 (=attano attano va tesaṁ pabhā ti DA.I,110); A.V,60; Sn.404. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhāsa: {'def': '﹐【阳】光，光彩壮丽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+bhās] shining, splendour, beauty S.I,67; sap° with beauty S.V,263; Miln.223; ap° without beauty Miln.299. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhāsati: {'def': '[pa+bhaṣ] to tell, declare, talk Th.1, 582. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+bhas+a) 照耀。【过】pabhāsi。【独】pabhasitvā。【现分】pabhasanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabhāseti: {'def': '[Caus. of pa+bhās] to illumine, pervade with light, enlighten Dh.172 (=obhāseti DhA.III,169), 382 (=obhāseti ekālokaṁ karoti DhA.IV,137); J.I,87; Pv.I,10⁹ (so read for ca bh°); II,1¹²; Ps.I,174; Miln.336; PvA.10 (=obhāseti). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pabhasati【使】)，照明，以光弥漫。。【过】pabhasesi。【过分】pabhasita。【现分】pabhasenta。【独】pabhasetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabhāta: {'def': '【阳】黎明(daybreak)，破晓(dawn)。【形】变成清楚的，变成光亮的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pabhāti] become clear or light, shining, dawning Sn.178 (sup°); esp. in phrase pabhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i.e. given way to dawn, at daybreak J.I,81, 500. -- (nt.) daybreak, morning S.I,211; SnA 519 (pabhāte); atipabhāte in broad daylight J.I,436. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhāti: {'def': '[pa+bhā] to shine forth, to become light, gleam, glitter J.V,199 (said of a river; =pavattati C.). -- pp. pabhāta. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhāva: {'def': '(梵prabhava)﹐【阳】威德，势力(power, strength)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+bhū] might, power, strength, majesty, dignity J.V,36; VI,449. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhāveti: {'def': '(pa+bhū+e)﹐增加，增大，弥漫。increases; augments; permeates with.【过】pabhāvesi。【独】pabhāvetva。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pabhavati] to increase, augment, foster Pv.II,9⁶⁴=DhA.III,220 (dakkhiṇeyyaṁ). -- pp. pabhāvita. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhāvita: {'def': '[pp. of pabhāveti] increased, furthered, promoted Th.1, 767 (bhava-netti°); expl^d by samuṭṭhita C. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhāṇin: {'def': 'at Kern, Toev. s. v. is wrongly given with quot. J.V,421 (in meaning “speaking”) where it should be read manāpa-bhāṇin, and not manā-p°. (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabhū: {'def': '【阳】大君主，统治者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabodhana: {'def': '【中】苏醒，清醒，觉悟。awakening; arousing; enlightenment.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. pabodhati] 1. (nt.) awakening waking, arising DhA.I,232 (°codana-kamma). -- 2. (adj.) arousing (or realising?) Vv 64²² (=kata-pīti-pabodhano VvA.282); awaking Th.1, 893 (samma-tāḷa°). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabodhati: {'def': '[pa+bodhati] to awake, also trs. awaken, stir up, give rise to (or: to recognise, realise?); only in one phrase (perhaps corrupt), viz. yo nindaṁ appabodhati S Q7=Dh.143 (=nindaṁ apaharanto bujjhati DhA.III,86; trsl. KS 13 “forestalleth blame”). ‹-› Caus. pabodheti (1) to enlighten, instruct, give a sign J.I,142; III,511. -- (2) to set going, arouse J.I,298; V,390. -- (3) to render oneself conspicuous J.V,8. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabodheti: {'def': '(pa+budh醒+e)﹐醒来，觉醒，觉悟。arouses; awakens; enlightens。【过】pabodhesi。【过分】pabodhita。【独】pabodhetvā。【现分】pabodhentā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabrūṭi: {'def': '[pa+brūti] to speak out, proclaim, declare (publicly) Sn.131, 649, 870, 952 and passim (cp. Nd¹ 211, 273; Nd² 398, 465). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabuddha: {'def': '[pp. of pabujjhati] awakened S.I,143 (sutta° from sleep awakened), J.I,50; VvA.65. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabujjhati: {'def': '(pa+budh醒+ya)﹐觉醒，觉悟(awakes, understands)。【过】pabujjhi。【独】pabujjhitvā。【过分】pabuddha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+bujjhati] to wake up (intrs.), awake S.I,4, 209; Dh.296 sq.; It.41 (suttā p.); J.I,61; II,103; IV,431 (opp. niddāyati); DA.I,140. -- pp. pabuddha (q. v.). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabāhati: {'def': '[pa+bṛh to pull, see abbahati] to pull out, draw forth D.I,77 (T. reads pavāhati, v. l. pabbāḷhati, evidently fr. pabāḷha); cp. Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa IV.3, 3, 16. -- pp. pabāḷha¹ (q. v.). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pabājeti: {'def': '(pa+vaj+e) , 放逐、驱逐、使出家(exiles; banishes; makes a monk)。【过】pabajesi。【过分】pabajita。【独】pabajetvā。Pārā.III,46(CS:p.57)︰Pabbājeyyuṁ vāti gāmā vā nigamā vā nagarā vā janapadā vā janapadapadesā vā pabbājeyyuṁ.(放逐︰放逐於村外、或乡外、或城外、或省外、或国外。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pabāḷha: {'def': '² (adj.) [pa+bāḷha] strong, sharp (of pain) D.II,128; J.V,422, Miln.174. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of pabāhati] pulled out, drawn forth D.I,77 (T. reads pavāḷha). See pavāḷha. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacala: {'def': '[fr. pa+cal] shaking, trembling, wavering DhsA.378. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacalati: {'def': '[pa+calati] to dangle VvA.36 (v. l. BB paj°). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacalita: {'def': '[pp. of pacalati] shaken, wavering, unstable Th.1, 260. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacalāyati: {'def': '(pa+cal +āya), 困倦，打盹儿，打瞌睡(拄痀tuh ku，啄龟toh ku)。【过】pacalāyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + cal + āya), 困倦，打瞌睡，打盹儿。【过】 ~lāyi。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[quasi-denom. or caus. fr. pacala, pa+cal, cp. daṇḍāyati and pacāleti] to make (the eyelid) waver, to wink, to be sleepy, nod, begin to doze A.III,343= IV.344; IV,85 (quot. at DhsA.236); J.I,384 (°āyituṁ ārabbhi); Vism.300. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacalāyikā: {'def': '(abstr. fr. pacalāyati),【阴】打盹，打瞌睡(nodding, wavering (of the eyelids), blinking, being sleepy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】打盹儿，打瞌睡。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. pacalāyati] nodding, wavering (of the eyelids), blinking, being sleepy Dhs.1157 (=akkhidalādīnaṁ pacalabhāvaṁ karoti DhsA.378). (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pac, su pacati] cooking J̄ III,425 (°thālikā); V,385 (°bhājana); ThA.29 (bhatta°); DA.I,270; PvA.135. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】烹饪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】烹饪。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pacarati: {'def': '(pa + car + a), 练习，观察，走路。【过】 pacari。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+car+a), 练习，观察，走路。【过】pacari。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+carati] to go after, walk in; fig. practise, perform, observe Vv 32⁹ (v. l. pavarati, cp. VvA.136). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacati: {'def': '(pac+a)(Ved. pacati), 烹调、折磨、煎熬(to cook, boil, roast, torment)。【过】paci。【过分】pacita, pakka。【现分】pacanta。【义】pacitabba。【独】pacitvā。Caus. pacāpeti & pāceti。Pass. paccati.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Ved. pacati, Idg. *peqǔō, Av. pac-; Obulg. peka to fry, roast, Lith, kepū bake, Gr. pέssw cook, pέpwn ripe] to cook, boil, roast Vin.IV,264; fig. torment in purgatory (trs. and intrs.): Niraye pacitvā after roasting in N. S.II,225, PvA.10, 14. -- ppr. pacanto tormenting, Gen. pacato (+Caus. pācayato) D.I,52 (expl^d at DA.I,159, where read pacato for paccato, by pare daṇḍena pīḷentassa). -- pp. pakka (q. v.). ‹-› Caus. pacāpeti & pāceti (q. v.). -- Pass. paccati to be roasted or tormented (q. v.). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pac + a), 烹调。【过】 paci。【过分】 pacita, pakka。【现分】 pacanta。【潜】 pacitabba。【独】 pacitvā。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccabhiññāṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+abhi+ñāṇa] recognition DhsA.110. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccaggaḷa: {'def': '(adj.) [pratyak+gaḷa] in phrase paccaggaḷe aṭṭhāsi “stuck in his throat” M.I,333. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccaggha: {'def': '【形】昂贵的。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】昂贵的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+aggha, cp. Sk. pratyagra of diff. derivation] recent, new, beautiful, quite costly Vin.I,4; J.I,80; II,435; Pv.II,3¹⁶ (=abhinava mahaggha vā PvA.87); III,10⁵ (=abhinava PvA.214); Dāvs.V,25; PvA.44. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccagū: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [a difficult word, composed of pacca+ gū, the latter a by-form of °ga, as in paṭṭhagū, vedagū pāragū. pacca may be praṭya, an adv. formⁿ of prep. praṭi, and paṭṭha its doublet. It is not certain whether we should read paṭṭhagū here as well (see paṭṭhagū). The form may also be expl^d as a substantivised pl. 3rd pret. of praṭi+gacchati=paccaguṁ] “one who goes toward,” a pupil S.I,104 (Mārassa); vv. ll. baddhabhū, paṭṭhagū. Windisch, Māra & Buddha trsl^s “unter M’s Herrschaft,” and refers paṭṭhagu to Sk., pātyagāḥ. Bdhgh (see Kindred Sayings, 1, p. 319) reads baddhagū and expl^ns by bandhavara sissa antevāsika. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccakkha: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+akkha³, cp. Ved. pratyakṣa] “before the eye,” perceptible to the senses, evident, clear, present DhsA.254; PvA.125; Sdhp.416. Often in obl. cases, viz. Instr. °ena personally J.I,377; Abl. °ato from personal experience J.V,45, 195, 281; appaccakkhāya without seeing or direct perception, in explⁿ of paccaya at Vism.532; also in phrase paccakkhato ñatvā having seen or found out for himself, knowing personally J.I,262; III,168.

--kamma making clear, i. e. demonstration, realisation, only neg. a° not realising etc. S.III,262; Dhs.390 (trsl. “inability to demonstrate”; cp. DhsA.254). (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】显然的，明白的，感觉得到的。 ~kamma, 【中】实现，领会。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi对著+akkha眼),【形】显然的，明白的，现量的，在眼前的，现见的，眼前(眼之所对)，当面。paccakkhakamma,【中】实现，领会。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccakkhāna: {'def': '【中】拒绝，退回，放弃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭi+ā+khyā] rejection, refusal J.VI,422. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】拒绝，退回，放弃。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccakkhāta: {'def': '[pp. of paccakkhāti] rejected, given up, abandoned, repudiated Vin.II,244, 245 (sikkhā); III,25 (id.); J.IV,108; DhA.I,12. Cp. Vin. Texts I.275. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccakkhāti: {'def': '(pati + ā + khā + a), 驳回，拒绝，否认，放弃。【过】 ~khāsi。【过分】 ~khāta。【独】 ~khāya。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pati+ā+khā掘+a), 驳回，拒绝，否认，放弃。【过】paccakkhāsi。【过分】paccakkhāta。【独】paccakkhāya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+akkhāti=ā+khyā] lit. to speak against, i. e. to reject, refuse, disavow, abandon, give up, usually in connection with Buddhaṁ, dhammaṁ, sikkhaṁ or similar terms of a religious-moral nature Vin.III,25; S.II,231, 271; A.IV,372. -- ger. paccak- khāya, in foll. conn^s ācariyaṁ J.IV,200; sikkhaṁ Vin.III,23, 34 (a°); S.II,231; IV,190; Pug.66, 67; sabbaṁ S.IV,15; ariyasaccaṁ S.V,428. paccakkhāsi at J.V,8 is gloss for pakatthāsi. -- pp. paccakkhāta (q. v.). ‹-› Intens. paccācikkhati (q. v.). (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccakkosana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭi+ā+kruś] cursing in return DhA.IV,148 (a°). (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccakkosati: {'def': '[paṭi+ā+kruś] to curse in return S.I,162; A.II,215. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pati+ā+kus(梵kruw)大叫+a), 骂回。【过】paccakkosi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pati + ā + kus + a), 骂回。【过】 ~kosi。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccaladdhaṁsu: {'def': 'see paṭilabhati. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paccati, cp. pacana] being boiled, boiling. torture, torment J.V,270; SnA 476 (°okāsa). (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】沸腾，遭受，苦楚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】沸腾，遭受，苦楚。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccanika: {'def': '【形】相反的，颠倒的，否定的，不利的。【阳】敌人，对手。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Paccanīya (adj. n.) [cp. Sk. pratyanīka & see paccatthika] 1. contrary, adverse, opposed; (1) m. enemy, adversary, opponent M.I,378; S.I,179; IV,127= Sn.761; Ps.II,67 sq.; SnA 288. Cp. vi.° -- 2. (in method) reverse, negative, opp. to anuloma. Tikp 71 passim; cp. paṭiloma.

--gāthā response, responding verse (cp. paṭigāthā) SnA 39. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccanta: {'def': '(adj. n.) [paṭi+anta, cp. Sk. pratyanta] adj. adjoining, bordering on, neighbouring, adjacent Dh.315; J.I,11 (V.47, °desa), 377 (°vāsika); PvA.201 (°nagara); DhA.III,488 (id.); Sdhp.11 (°visaya). ‹-› (m.) the border, outskirts, neighbourhood Vin.I,73; J.I,126 (vihāra°); II,37; Miln.314 (°e kupite in a border disturbance); DhA.I,101 (id.); PvA.20 (id.). °ṁ vūpasāmeti to appease the border PvA.20. -- P. in sense of “heathen” at Vism.121. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】国界，边地，乡下地方。paccantadesa,【阳】国家的近郊。paccantavāsin,【阳】村民，乡下人。paccantavisaya,【阳】参考 paccantadesa。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】国界，乡下地方。 ~desa, 【阳】国家的近郊。 ~vāsī, 【阳】村民，乡下人。 ~visaya, 【阳】参考 ~desa。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccantima: {'def': '【形】边疆的，在远方的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paccanta, cp. BSk. pratyantima frontier Divy 21, 426] bordering, adjoining, next to Vin. II.166; Sdhp.5. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】边疆的，在远方的(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccanubhavati: {'def': 'paccanubhoti (pati+anu随+bhū+a), 遭受，经历，经验。【过】paccanubhavi。【独】paccanubhavitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'paccanubhoti (pati + anu + bhū + a), 遭受，经历。【过】~bhavi。【独】 ~bhavitvā。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccanubhoti: {'def': '[paṭi+anu+bhū, BSk. pratyanubhavati Divy 54, 262 etc.] to experience, undergo, realise M.I,295; S.V,218, 264 sq., 286 sq. 353; A.III,425 sq.; It.38; PvA.26, 44, 107 (dukkhaṁ). -- fut. paccanubhossati D.II,213; S.I,133, 227; Pv III,5⁶. -- Pass. paccanubhavīyati PvA.146 (for upalabbhati). -- pp. paccanubhūta M.II,32; S.II,178; It.15. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccanubhāsati: {'def': '[paṭi+anubhāsati, cp. BSk. pratyavabhāṣate to call to Divy 9] to speak out or mention correspondingly, to enumerate KhA 78, 79 sq. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccanubhūta: {'def': '(Paccanubhavati的【过分】), 已遭遇，已经历。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccanusiṭṭha: {'def': '[paṭi+anusiṭṭha] advised, admonished D.II,209=225. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccanīka: {'def': '【形】相反的，颠倒的，否定的，不利的，障碍的，违义的。【阳】敌人，对手。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccassosi: {'def': '(paṭissuṇāti 的【过】), 同意了，答应了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭissuṇāti 的【过】), 同意了，答应了。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see patissuṇāṭi. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccasāri: {'def': 'see paṭisarati. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccati: {'def': '(pacati 的【被】), 被烹调，遭受。【过】pacci。【独】paccitvā。【现分】paccamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pacati 的【被】), 被烹调，遭受。【过】 pacci。【独】 paccitvā。【现分】 paccamāna。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Pass. of pacati, cp. BSk. pacyate Divy 422] to be boiled, fig. to be formented or vexed, to suffer. Nearly always applied to the torture of boiling in Niraya, where it is meant literally. -- S.I,92; V,344 (kālena paccanti read for kāle na p.); A.I,141 (phenuddehakaṁ p. niraye); Sn.670, 671; Dh.69, 119, 120 (pāpaṁ suffer for sin, cp. DhA.III,14); J.V,268; Pv IV.1²⁹ (=dukkhaṁ pāpuṇanti PvA.228); IV,3³⁹ (niraye paccare janā=paccanti PvA.255); DhA.III,64 (explⁿ for tappati). (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccatta: {'def': '【形】分开的，单独的。 ~ttaŋ, 【副】个别地，单独地。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】分开的，单独的。paccattaṁ,【副】个别地，单独地。paccattavacanaṁ(梵praṭhamā；accusative)﹐主格。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+attan] separate, individual; usually Acc. °ṁ adv. separately, individually, singly, by himself, in his own heart D.I,24 (yeva nibbuti viditā); DA. on D.II,77=attano attano abbhantare; M.I,251, 337 (°vedaniya N. of a purgatory), 422; S.II,199; III,54 sq., IV.23, 41 sq., 168, 539; Sn.611, 906; Dh.165; Pv III,10⁶ (°vedanā separate sufferings, =visuṁ visuṁ attanā anubhūyamānā mahādukkhavedanā PvA.214); Dhs.1044 (ajjhatta+; trsl^d “self referable”); Miln.96 (°purisa-kāra); DhsA.169; VvA.9, 13; PvA.232.

--vacana expression of separate relation, i. e. case of reference, or of the direct object, reflexive case, N. of the Acc. case SnA 303; VvA.281; PvA.30, 35; KhA 213, 236; in lieu of karaṇa KhA 213, of sāmin SnA 594. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccattaṁ: {'def': '各自的;个别的(Paccatta)的 acc.(直接)受格;(日译)对格;目的格', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Paccattharaṇa: {'def': '【中】盖子，覆盖的东西，床单。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pati+ā+stṛ, cp. BSk. pratyāstaraṇa Divy 19] something spread against, i. e. under or over, a cover, spread, rug, cushion or carpet to sit on, bedding of a couch (nisīdana°) Vin.I,47, 295, 296; II,208, 218; D.I,7 (kadali-miga-pavara°, cp. DA.I,87); A.I,137 (id.); III,50 (id.); J.I,126; IV,353 (uṇṇāmaya); PvA.141, 137. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】盖子，覆盖的东西，床单。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccatthata: {'def': '[pp. of gaṭi+ā+stṛ] spread out D.II,211. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccatthika: {'def': '(adj. n.) [paṭi+attha+ka, lit. opposite to useful, cp. Sk. pratyanīka & pratyarthin] an opponent, adversary, enemy Vin.II,94 sq. (atta° personal enemy); A.V,71 (id.; T. attha°); D.I,50, 70, 137; It.83; PvA.62. Cp. paccāmitta. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】敌人，对手。【形】反对，敌对的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】敌人，对手。【形】反对，敌对的。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccavekkhana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】考虑，检讨，反省。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) & Paccavekkhanā (f.) [paṭi+avekkhana, cp. late Sk. pratyaveksana & °nā] looking at, consideration, regard, attention, reflection, contemplation, reviewing (cp. Cpd. 58) M.I,415; D.III,278; A.III,27; Pug.21 (a°); Dhs.390 (a°=dhammānaṁ sabhāvaṁ pati na apekkhati DhsA.254, trsl. “inability to consider”); Miln.388; Nett 85; VbhA.140; Vism.43 (twofold); Sdhp.413. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccavekkhati: {'def': '(paṭi+ava下+ikkh见+a), 省思，省察，考虑，回顾，沉思。【过】paccavekkhi。【过分】paccavekkhita。【独】paccavekkhitvā, paccavekkhiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pati + ava + ikkh + a), 考虑，回顾，沉思。【过】 ~kkhi。【过分】 ~kkhita。【独】 ~khitvā, ~vekkhiya。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+avekkhati] to look upon, consider, review, realise, contemplate, see M.I,415; S.III,103; 151 sq., IV.111, 236 sq.; J.V,302; Vbh.193, 194 (cp. A.III,323); Miln.16; PvA.62, 277; VvA.6, 48. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccavekkhaṇa: {'def': '(paṭi+avekkhana, 梵 Pratyaveksaṇa),【中】paccavekkhaṇā,【阴】考虑，检讨，反省(looking at, consideration, regard, attention, reflection, contemplation, reviewing)。paccavekkhaṇāvasitā﹐省察自在，能够在出定后省察刚刚证得的禅那的能力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccavekkhā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. late Sk. pratyavekṣā] imagination Mbhv 27. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccavidhuṁ: {'def': '& Paccavyādhiṁ see paṭivijjhati. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccaya: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+i, cp. Ved. pratyaya & P. pacceti, paṭicca] lit. resting on, falling back on, foundation; cause, motive etc. See on term as t.t. of philosophy Tikapaṭṭhāna I, foreword; J.P.T.S. 1916, 21 f.; Cpd. 42 sq. & esp. 259 sq. -- 1. (lit.) support, requisite, means, stay. Usually with ref. to the 4 necessaries of the bhikkhu’s daily life, viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senāsana, (gilānapaccaya-) bhesajja, i. e. clothing, food as alms, a dwelling-place, medicine: see under cīvara. Sn.339 (paccaya=gilāna-paccaya SnA 342); Miln.336; Mhvs 3, 15. -- 2. (appl^d) reason, cause, ground, motive, means, condition M.I,259 (yaṁ yad eva paccayaṁ paṭicca by whatever cause or by whichever means); S.II,65; Nett 78 sq.; DA.I,125; PvA.104. The fourfold cause (catubbidho paccayo) of rūpa (material form) consists of kamma, citta, utu, āhāra: Vism.600. Var. paccayas discussed at VbhA.166 sq. (twofold, with ref. to paṭisandhi), 183 (eightfold), 202, 205 sq. 254 (4). sappaccaya founded, having a reason or cause S.V,213 sq.; A.I,82; Nd² mūla; Dhs.1084, 1437. -- yathā paccayaṁ karoti do as he likes Nd² p. 280=S.III,33. Often coupled with hetu, e. g. at S.IV,68 sq.; A. I.66; IV,151 sq.; D.III,284; Nd² under mūla; Ps.II,116 sq., paccaya came to be distinguished from hetu as the genus of which hetu was the typical, chief species. I. e. paccaya became synonymous with our “relation,” understood in a causal sense, hetu meaning condition, causal antecedent, and 23 other relations being added as special modes of causality. Later still these 24 were held reducible to 4 Tikp 1 f. (and foreword); Cpd. 197. Cp. Paṭṭhāna. -- Abl. paccayā as adv. by means of, through, by reason of, caused by D.I,45 (vedanā °taṇhā etc., see paṭicca-samuppāda); M.I,261 (jātippaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ); Pv.I,5² (kamma°); IV,1⁵⁰ (tap°); PvA.147 (kamma°). -- 3. ground for, belief, confidence, trust, reliance J.I,118, 169; apara° without relying on anyone else S.III,83, 135; A.IV,186, 210; PvA.226.

--ākāra the mode of causes, i. e. the Paṭiccasamuppāda DhsA.2, 3; VbhA.130 sq. (cp. Vism.522 sq.). (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. paṭi+i, cp. Ved. pratyaya & P. pacceti, paṭicca),【阳】1.因素，动机，方法，支援。2.必需品(四资具)。Abl. paccayā as adv. by means of, through, by reason of, caused by。paccayatā,【阴】因果关系。paccayākāra,【阳】因素的模式(缘相)，原因的起源。paccayuppanna,【形】有因素兴起的。paccayasatti﹐【阴】缘力。AA.3.99./II,362.：Yathāpaccayaṁ vā kātunti yathā icchati, tathā kātuṁ.(随缘所作︰任意处置。)。paccayadhamma﹐缘法。paccayuppannadhamma﹐缘所生法，缘生法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】因素，动机，必需品，方法，支持。 ~tā, 【阴】因果关系。~yākāra, 【阳】因素的模式，原因的起源。 ~yuppanna, 【形】有因素兴起的。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccayatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. paccaya] the fact of having a cause, causation, causal relation, in phrase idappaccayatā (adv.) from an ascertained cause, by way of cause Vin.I,5; D.I,185; S.I,136; II,25. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccayika: {'def': '【形】可信赖的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paccaya] trustworthy D.I,4; S.I,150; A.II,209; J.VI,384 (paccāyika); Pug.57; DA.I,73; SnA 475. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可信赖的。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pacca°: {'def': 'is contracted form of paṭi before a°, like paccakampittha pret. fr. paṭikampati. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccañjana: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+añjana] anointing, ointment, unction D.I,12=M.I,511; DA.I,98 (=bhavanīya-sītalabhessajj’añjanaṁ). (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccaṅga: {'def': '【中】分支，小支（区别于大支）。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+aṅga] lit. “by-limb,” small limb, only in comp^d aṅgapaccaṅgāni limbs great and small, all limbs: see aṅga. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】分支，小支(区别於大支)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacceka: {'def': '( [paṭi对]+[eka一?单独] ),【形】分开的，各自的，各种不同的，单一的。paccekaṁ,【副】个别地，个人地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+eka, cp. BSk. pratyeka Divy 335, 336] each one, single, by oneself, separate, various, several D.I,49 (itthi); II,261 (°vasavattin, of the 10 issaras); S.I,26 (°gāthā a stanza each), 146 (°brahma an independent Brahma); A.II,41 (°sacca); V,29 (id.); Sn.824 (id.), 1009 (°gaṇino each one having followers= visuṁ visuṁ gaṇavanto SnA 583); J.IV,114 (°bodhiñāṇa); Nd¹ 58 (°muni); DA.I,148 (paccekā itthiyo); SnA 52 (°bodhisatta one destined to become a Paccekabuddha), 67 (id.), 73 (°sambodhi), 476 (niraya a separate or special purgatory); PvA.251 (id.), Sdhp.589 (°bodhi). -- paccekaṁ (adv.) singly, individually, to each one VvA.282. See also pāṭekka.

--buddha one enlightened by himself, i. e. one who has attained to the supreme and perfect insight, but dies without proclaiming the truth to the world. M.III,68; S.I,92 (“Silent Buddha” trslⁿ); J.III,470; IV,114; Ud.50 (P. Tagarasikhi); Nett 190; KhA 178, 199; SnA 47, 58, 63; DhA.I,80, 171, 224, 230; IV,201; PvA.144, 263, 265 (=isi), 272, 283. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】分开的，各自的，各种不同的，单一的。 ~buddha, 【阳】辟支佛（领悟解脱真理，而不传给世间他人）。 ~kaŋ, 【副】个别地，个人地。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccekabuddha: {'def': '(pacceka独一+buddha已觉者),【阳】辟支佛、独觉(独觉不一定观缘起，所以不应称「缘觉」)、已独一觉者(没有老师指导而自己独自觉悟的人)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccekasambuddha: {'def': '(pacceka独一+sambuddha已完全觉者),【阳】已独一完全觉者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacceti: {'def': '(pati + i + a), 兴盛，领悟，退到。【过】 paccesi。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+i] to come on to, come back to, fig. fall back on, realise, find one’s hold in D.I,186 (“take for granted,” cp. note Dial. I.252); M.I,309 (kaṁ hetuṁ), 445 (id.); S.I,182 (“believe in,” C. icchati pattheti); Sn.662, 788, 800, 803, 840=908; Dh.125 (=paṭieti DhA.III,34); Nd¹ 85, 108 (=paccāgacchati), 114; Pv.II,3²⁰ (=avagacchati PvA.87); Nett 93; Miln.125, 313; PvA.116 (bālaṁ), 241 (agree to=paṭijānāti). ‹-› ger. paṭicca (q. v.). Cp. paccāgacchati -- pp. paṭīta (q. v.). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '([pati对﹑回]+[eti去﹑到﹑来]), 1.回到。2.缘，转而依靠。【过】paccesi。【独】paṭicca。【过分】paṭīta, patīta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacchada: {'def': '[fr. pa+chad, cp. Sk. pracchada] a cover, wrapper; girdle Th.2, 378 (=uracchada ThA253); DhsA.397 (v. l. for °cchāda). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchanna: {'def': '(pacchādeti 的【过分】), 已覆盖，已隐藏，已以…包起来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+channa, of chad] covered, wrapped, hidden Th.1, 299; J.III,129. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pacchādeti 的【过分】), 已覆盖，已隐藏，已以…包起来。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pacchato: {'def': '【无】来自后面，后面。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】来自后面，后面。【副】从以后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Abl. formation fr. *paccha=Ved. paścā & paścāt, fr. Idg. *pos as in Lith. pàs near by, pastaras the last; cp. Av. pasca behind, Lat. post, after] behind, after Dh.348 (=anāgatesu khandhesu DhA.IV,63; opp. pure); PvA.56, 74; DhA.III,197 (°vatti). Often doubled pacchato pacchato, i. e. always or close behind, J.II,123 (opp. purato purato). -- Cp. pacchā & pacchima. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchaḍḍana: {'def': '(nt.) [pa+chaḍḍana] vomiting, throwing out Sdhp.137. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchedana: {'def': '【中】切断，打破。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】切断，打破。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+chid] breaking, cutting DA.I,141. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchi: {'def': '【阴】手提篮（菜篮）。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [etym. doubtful] a basket J.I,9, 243; II,68; III,21; VI,369 (paṇṇa°), 560 (phala°); DhA.II,3; IV,205 (°pasibbaka). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】手提篮(菜篮)。macchapacchiṁ﹐鱼篮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacchijjana: {'def': '【中】打岔，中止。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】打岔，中止。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. last] stopping, interruption J.III,214 (read assu-pacchijjana-divaso? passage corrupt.). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchijjati: {'def': '(pa+chid切断+ya), 被打断，被中断。【过】pacchijji。【过分】pacchinna。【独】pacchijitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + chid + ya), 被打断，被中断。【过】 ~jji。【过分】 pacchinna。【独】 ~jitvā。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+chijjati, Pass. of chid] to be cut short, to be interrupted J.I,503 (lohitaṁ p.). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchima: {'def': '【形】1.最后。2.最落后。3.西方的。pacchimaka,【形】1.最后的。2.最落后的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】最近的，最后面的，最低的，西方的。 ~maka, 【形】最后的，最低劣的。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. paścima, superl. formation fr. *paśca, cp. pacchato & pacchā] 1. hindmost, hind-, back-, last (opp. purima), latest D.I,239; M.I,23 (°yāma the last night watch); DA.I,45 sq. (id. °kicca duties or performances in the 3^rd watch, corresp. to purima° & majjhima°); Sn.352; J.IV,137 (°pāda); VI,364 (°dvāra); PvA.5, 75. -- 2. western (opp. purima or puratthima) D.I,153 (disā); S.I,145. -- 3. lowest, meanest Vin.II,108; M.I,23; S.II,203. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchimaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pacchima] 1. last, latest (opp. purimaka) Vin.II,9; Nd² 284 D.=Th.1, 202; DhsA.262; J.VI,151. -- 2. lowest, meanest J.I,285 (pacchimakā itthiyo). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchimayāma: {'def': '(pacchima最后+yāma夜分), 最后夜分(2am~6am)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacchindati: {'def': '(pa + chid + ŋ-a), 中断，瓦解，结束。【过】 ~ndi。【过分】~chinna。【独】 ~nditvā。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+chid切断+ṁ-a), 中断，瓦解，结束。【过】pacchindi。【过分】pacchinna。【独】pacchinditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+chindati] 1. to break up, cut short, put an end to Vin.IV,272; J.I,119 (kathaṁ °itvā), 148 (kathaṁ °ituṁ); IV,59; PvA.78 (dānavidhiṁ °i). -- 2. to bring up (food), to vomit DhA.I,183 (āhāraṁ). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchita: {'def': '[pa+chita, Sk. pracchita, pp. of chā, only in combⁿ with prefixes] cut off, skinned J.VI,249. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchā: {'def': '【无】然后。【副】以后。pacchājāta,【形】后生的，后起的。pacchānipātī，【阳】比其他更稍后退休者。pacchānutāpa,【阳】懊悔，后悔。pacchābāhaṁ,【副】手被绑在背后地。pacchābhattaṁ,【副】在食后。pacchābhāga,【阳】后边的部份。【处】然后。pacchāsamaṇa,【阳】后沙门(走在长老背后，较小辈的出家人)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic paścā & paścāt see pacchato] behind, aft, after, afterwards, back; westward D.I,205; Sn.645, 773, 949; Nd¹ 33 (=pacchā vuccati anāgataṁ, pure vuccati atītaṁ); Nd² 395; Dh.172, 314, 421; Pv.I,11¹, 11⁵ (opp. purato); II,9⁹ (=aparabhāge PvA.116); PvA.4, 50, 88; VvA.71.

--ânutappati [fr. ânutāpa] to feel remorse Pv.II,7¹²; J.V,117. -- ânutāpa [cp. Sk. paścattāpa] remorse, repentance Sdhp.288. --āsa (nt.) [āsa²] “eating afterwards, “ i. e. aftermath S.I,74 -- gacchati at Kvu 624 see paccā°. --gataka going or coming behind J.VI,30. --jāta (-paccaya), 11th of the 24 paccayas, q. v. causal relation of posteriority in time. --nipātin one who retires to rest later than another (opp. Pubb’uṭṭhāyin getting up before others) D.I,60; III,191; A.III,37; IV,265, 267 sq.; DA.I,168. -- bāhaṁ “arm behind,” i. e. with arms (tied) behind one’s back D.I,245; J.I,264; DhA.II,39. -- bhatta “after-meal,” i. e. after the midday meal, either as °ṁ (Acc.-adv.) in the afternoon, after the main meal, usually comb^d with piṇḍapāta. paṭikkanta “returning from the alms-round after dinner” A.III,320; PvA.11, 16, 38 and passim (cp. BSk. paścādbhakta-piṇḍapāta-pratikrānta, see Indexes to AvŚ. & Divy), or as °kicca the duties after the midday meal (opp. purebhatta°) DA.I,47 (in detail); SnA 133, 134. --bhattika one who eats afterwards, i. e. afternoon, when it is improper to eat A.III,220 (khalu°, q. v.). --bhāga hind or after part J.II,91; PvA.114. --bhāsati see paccā°. --bhūma belonging to the western country S.III,5. --bhūmaka id. S.IV,312=A.V,263. --mukha looking westward M.III,5; D.II,207; Th.1, 529; DhA.III,155 (opp. pācīna eastern). -- vāmanaka dwarfed in his hind part J.IV,137. -- samaṇa [BSk. paścācchramaṇa & opp. purahśramaṇa AvŚ II.67, 150; Divy 154, 330, 494] a junior Wanderer or bhikkhu (Thera) who walks behind a senior (Thera) on his rounds. The one accompanying Gotama Buddha is Ānanda Vin.I,46; III,10 (Ānanda); IV,78 (id.); Ud.90 (Nāgasamāla); J.IV,123; Miln.15 (Nāgasena); PvA.38, 93 (Ānanda). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】然后。 ~jāta, 【形】后生的，后起的。 ~nipātī，【阳】比其它更稍后退休者。 ~nutāpa, 【阳】懊悔，后悔。 ~bāhaŋ, 【副】手被绑在背后地。~bhattaŋ, 【副】下午。 ~bhāga, 【阳】后边的部份。【处】然后。 ~samaṇa, 【阳】后沙门（走在长老背后，较小辈的出家人）。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pacchāda: {'def': '【阳】盖子，二轮战车的毯子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】盖子，二轮战车的毯子。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+chāda] cover, covering, wrapper, in phrase nelaṅgo setappacchādo S.IV,291=Ud.76=DA.I,75= DhsA.397. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchāgacchati: {'def': '(参考 [paccāgacchati回来﹑撤回] ),1.回来。2.撤回。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacchāgata: {'def': '【过分】返回。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacchānipātin: {'def': '(pacchā以后+nipātin就寝),【形】晚就寝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacchānutappati: {'def': 'see under pacchā. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pacchā + anu + tap + a), 感到懊悔。【过】 ~tappi。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pacchā+anu随+tap(梵tap)热+a), 感到懊悔。【过】pacchānutappi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacchāpuresaññī: {'def': '(pacchā后+pure前+saññī想【形】),【形】前后想。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacchāsa: {'def': '[cp. pacchāli? perhaps fr. pacchā+aś] aftermath S.I,74. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacchāyā: {'def': '【阴】阴暗的部份，荫凉处。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [pa+chāyā] a place in the shade, shaded part Vin.I,180; II,193; D.I,152 (=chāyā DA.I,310); II,205; A.III,320. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa在前+chāyā影),【阴】阴暗的部份，荫凉处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacchāḷiyaṁ: {'def': 'at A.III,76 is of uncertain reading & meaning; in phrase p. khipanti: either “throw into the lap” (?) or (better) read pacchiyaṁ, Loc. of pacchi “into the basket” (of the girls & women). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccora: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+avara, cp. Sk. pratyavara] lower, rt. lower part, hindquarter, bottom (?) A.IV,130; DhA.I,189. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccorohati: {'def': '(pati + ava + ruh + a), 下来，降。【过】 ~rohi。【过分】~corūḷha。【独】 ~rohitvā。 ~oruyha。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pati回++orohati下降), 下来，降。【过】paccorohi。【过分】paccorūḷha。【独】paccorohitvā。paccoruyha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+orohati] to come down again, descend D.I,50; II,73; A.V,65, 234. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccorohaṇī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paccorohati] the ceremony of coming down again (?), approaching or descending to (Acc.), esp. the holy fire A.V,234 sq., 249 sq., V, 251. Cp. orohaṇa & Sk. pratyavarohaṇa “descent,” N. of a cert. Gṛhya celebration (BR.). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccosakkanā: {'def': '【阴】撤退，退缩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】撤退，退缩。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. paccosakkati] withdrawal, retreat, going back, shrinking from DhsA.151. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccosakkati: {'def': '(pati + ava + sakk + a), 撤退，撤回。【过】 ~sakki。【过分】~kita。【独】 ~kitvā。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+osakkati which is either ava+sakkati (of ṣvaṣk Geiger, P.Gr. § 28² or sṛp Trenckner Notes 60), or apa+sakkati] to withdraw, retreat, go away again D.I,230; J.I,383; Mhvs 25, 84. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pati回+ava下+sakk+a), 撤退，撤回。【过】paccosakki。【过分】paccokkita。【独】paccokkitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccoḍḍita: {'def': '[paṭi+oḍḍita] laid in return (of a snare) J.II,183 (v. l. paccoṭṭita). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccuddharati: {'def': '[paṭi+uddharati] to wipe off or down (with a cloth, colakena) Vin.II,122 (udakapuñchaniṁ; trsl. Vin. Texts II.152 “to wear out a robe”), 151 (gerukaṁ; trsl. Vin. Texts II.151 “to wipe down”). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccuddhāra: {'def': '[paṭi+uddhāra] taking up, casting (the lot) again Vin.IV,121. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccudeti: {'def': '[paṭi+ud+i] go out towards J.VI,559. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccudāharati: {'def': '[paṭi+ud+ā+hṛ] recite in reply Th.2, 40. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccudāvattana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. preceding] coming back, return DhsA.389. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccudāvattati: {'def': '[paṭi+ud+ā+vattati] to return again to (Acc.) S.I,224; II,104; A.V,337. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccuggacchati: {'def': '(pati + u + gam + a), 去会见。【独】 ~ggantvā。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+ud+gam] to go out, set out, go out to meet Vin.II,210; M.I,206; Sn.442 (=abhimukho upari gacchati SnA 392). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pati+u 出+gam去+a), 去会见。【独】paccuggantvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccuggamana: {'def': '【中】去会见。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】去会见。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. preceding] going out to, meeting, receiving J.IV,321; PvA.61, 141 (°ṁ karoti). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccuggata: {'def': '[pp. of paccuggacchati] illustrious J.VI,280. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccukkaḍḍhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. preceding] drawing out again Vin.V,222. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccukkaḍḍhati: {'def': '[paṭi+ukkaḍḍhati] to draw out again Vin.II,99. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccupadissati: {'def': '[reading uncertain; either paṭi+upadissati, or fut. of paṭi+upadisati, cp. upadaṁseti. It is not to be derived fr. °upadadāti] to accept, receive; or: to show, point out J.V,221 (v. l. paccuttarissati to go through, perhaps preferable; C. on p. 225 expl^s by sampaṭicchissati). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccupakāra: {'def': '【阳】帮回。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+uddhāra),【阳】帮回(taking up, casting (the lot) again)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccupalakkhaṇā: {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+upalakkhaṇā] differentiation S.III,261 (a°) Dhs.16=Pug.25; Dhs.292, 555, 1057. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccupaṭṭhahati: {'def': '([paṭi对]+[upa近﹑全部]+[sthā站立﹑存续] ), 1.对…全部存续(“to stand up before,” to be present)。2.照顾，奉侍。【过分】paccupaṭṭhita。【使】paccupaṭṭhāpeti。【未被】paccupaṭṭhātabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+upa+ sthā] “to stand up before,” to be present; only in pp. paccupaṭṭhita and in Caus. paccupaṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccupaṭṭhita: {'def': '[pp. of paccupaṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. pratyupasthita, Divy Index] (re)presented, offered, at one’s disposal, imminent, ready, present D.III,218 (°kāmā); It.95 (id.); Sn.p. 105; It.111; Kvu 157, 280; Miln.123. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccupaṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】明白，出现，突然产生，叁加。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. paṭi+upa+ ṭhā (梵sthā)),【中】明白，现起，突然产生(appearance, happening, coming on, phenomenon)。DhsA.(CS:p.106)：Upaṭṭhānākāro vā phalaṁ vā paccupaṭṭhānaṁ nāma.(产生现起或果，称为’现起’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭi+upa+ sthā; cp. Cpd. 13 & Lakkhaṇa] 1. (re)appearance, happening, coming on, phenomenon J.III,524; Nett 28; SnA 509; DhsA.332; ThA.288. 2. tending D.III,191. 3. vv. ll. gilānupaṭṭhāna. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccupaṭṭhāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of paccupaṭṭhahati] 1. to bring before or about, to arrange, provide, instal, fix S.IV,121; J.III,45; IV,105; V,211. 2. to minister to, wait upon D.III,189 sq. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pati+upa近+ṭhā +āpe), [paccupaṭṭhahati对…全部存续﹑照顾] 的【使】，提交…讨论，提供，侍候。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pati + upa + ṭhā + āpe), 提交…讨论，提供，安排。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccupaṭṭhāti: {'def': '(pati + upa + ṭhā + a), 出席。【过】 ~ṭhāsi。【过分】 ~ṭhita。【独】 ~ṭhitvā。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pati+upa近+ ṭhā (梵sthā) +a), 出席。【过】paccupaṭṭhāsi。【过分】paccupaṭṭhita。【独】paccupaṭṭhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccupekkhaṇā: {'def': '(f.)=paccavekkhaṇā S.III,262 (a°). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccupeti: {'def': '[pati+upeti] to go up or near to, to approach, serve, beset J.III,214. fut. °upessati J.IV,362 (gloss upasevati). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccuppanna: {'def': '([paṭi对﹑反﹑回+uppajjati被生] 的【过分】)。【阳】现在。【形】已存在的，当面的。Vism.431︰三种现在︰khaṇapaccuppanna,刹那现在(生、住、灭的三心刹那)，santatipaccuppanna, 相续现在(包摄二或三速行的时间)，addhāpaccuppanna, 一期现在(限於一生的期间)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+uppajjati, cp. Sk.pratyutpanna] what has arisen (just now), existing, present (as opposed to atīta past & anāgata future) M.I,307, 310; III,188; 190, 196; S.I,5; IV,97; A.I,264; III,151, 400; D.III,100, 220, 275; It.53; Nd¹ 340; Pv IV.6²; Dhs.1040, 1043; VbhA.157 sq.; PvA.100. See also atīta. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】已存在的，当面的。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccupādi: {'def': '[=paccuppādi. paṭi-uppajjati の aor.]現われた.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Paccuttarati: {'def': '[paṭi+uttarati, but cp. BSk. pratyavatarati to disembark Divy 229] to go out again, to withdraw S.I,8; A.III,190. Cp. paccupadissati. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi回﹑反+uttarati渡水而出), 渡水再出(to wipe off or down (with a cloth, colakena))。【独】paccuttaritvā。Udakapuñchaniṁ, “to wear out a robe”)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccuyyāti: {'def': '[paṭi+ud+yā] to go out against, to go to meet somebody S.I,82, 216. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccuṭṭhapanā: {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+ud+Caus. of sthā] putting against, resistance, opposition Sn.245 (=paccanīkaṭ ṭhapanā SnA 228). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccuṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】尊敬，起立。 ~ka, 【形】出现的，产生的。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】尊敬，起立(rising from one’s seat, reverence D.I,125.)。paccuṭṭhānaka,【形】出现的，产生的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. preceding] rising from one’s seat, reverence D.I,125. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccuṭṭhāti: {'def': '(paṭi对+uṭṭhāti(ud+sthā)起立﹑奋起), (表示敬礼地)起立(rise, reappear, to rise from one’s seat as a token of respect)。【过】paccuṭṭhāsi。【过分】paccuṭṭhita。【独】paccuṭṭhāya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pati + u + ṭhā + a), （表示敬礼地）起立。【过】 ~ṭhāsi。【过分】 ~ṭhita。【独】 ~ṭṭhāya。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+ud+ sthā] to rise, reappear, to rise from one’s seat as a token of respect; always comb^d with abhivadati D.I,61 (Pot. °uṭṭheyya), 110 (Fut. °uṭṭhassati). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccābhaṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of paccābhāsati] recited, explained J.II,48. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccābhāsati: {'def': '[paṭi+ābhāsati] to retort, recite, explain, relate PvA.57 (sic lege for pacchā°). -- pp. paccābhaṭṭha. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccācamati: {'def': '[paṭi+ā+camati; often spelt °vamati, but see Trenckner, Miln.425] to swallow up, resorb S.V,48= A.V,337; J.I,311; Miln.150; Caus. °camāpeti Miln.150. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccācikkhati: {'def': '[Intens. of paccakkhāti, paṭi+ā+cikkhati of khyā] to reject, repudiate, disallow D.III,3; M.I,245, 428; Vin.IV,235. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Intens. of paccakkhāti, paṭi+ā+cikkhati of khyā),拒绝(to reject, repudiate, disallow D.III,3; M.I,245, 428; Vin.IV,235.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccāgacchati: {'def': '[paṭi+āgacchati] to fall back on, return again, to go back to (Acc.), withdraw, slide back from (° to) Vin.I,184; M.I,265; III,114; Nd¹ 108, 312; Kvu 624 (spelt wrongly pacchā°); PvA.14, 109, 250. Cp. pacceti. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pati+ā+gam去+a), 回返，回来，撤回。【过】paccāgacchi。【过分】paccāgata。【独】paccāgantvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pati + ā + gam + a), 回返，回来，撤回。【过】 ~chi。【过分】 paccāgata。【独】 ~āgantvā。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccāgamana: {'def': '【中】返回，回来。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭi+ā+gam] return, going back, backsliding Miln.246. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. paṭi+ā+gam),【中】返回，回来(return, going back, backsliding Miln.246.)。)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccāgata: {'def': '[pp. of paccāgacchati] gone back, withdrawn J.V,120; Miln.125. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. of paccāgacchati), 返回，抽离(gone back, withdrawn)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccāharati: {'def': '[paṭi+āharati] to bring back, take back Vin.II,265; III,140; J.IV,304. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+ā+har拿+a), 拿回去(to bring back, take back)。【过】paccāhari。【过分】paccāhaṭa。【独】paccāharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pati + ā + har + a), 拿回来。【过】 ~hari。【过分】 ~cāhaṭa。【独】 ~haritvā。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccāhāra: {'def': '【阳】原谅，道歉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】原谅，道歉。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccājāta: {'def': '[pp. of paccājāyati] reborn, come to a new existence D.I,62; III,264; M.I,93; Pug.51. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. of paccājāyati),再生(reborn, come to a new existence)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccājāyati: {'def': '(pati+ā+jan+ya), (转世)再生(to be reborn in a new existence)。【过】paccājāyi。paccājāta。【独】paccājāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pati + ā + jan + ya), （转世）再生。【过】 ~jāyi。 ~jāta。【独】~jāyitvā。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+ā+jāyati] to be reborn in a new existence M.III,169; S.II,263; V,466, 474. -- pp. paccājāta (q. v.). (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccākata: {'def': '(pp. of paṭi+a+kr),【过分】已拒绝，已失望(rejected, disappointed)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已拒绝，已击败。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+a+kṛ] rejected, disappointed Vin.IV,237, 238. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccākoṭita: {'def': '(pp. of paṭi+ākoṭeti),【过分】已使平滑，已烫(flattened or smoothed out, pressed, ironed)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已使平滑，已烫。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+ākoṭeti] flattened or smoothed out, pressed, ironed (ākoṭita+of the robes) M.I,385; S.II,281; DhA.I,37. (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccāmitta: {'def': '【阳】敌人，对手。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paccā=Sk. pratyak, adv.;+mitta, cp. Ep. Sk. pratyamitra),【阳】敌人，对手(lit. “back-friend,” adversary, enemy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paccā=Sk. pratyak, adv.;+mitta, cp. Ep. Sk. pratyamitra] lit. “back-friend,” adversary, enemy D.I,70; A.IV,106; J.I,488: DA.I,182; PvA.155. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccāneti: {'def': '[paṭi+ā+neti] to lead back to (Acc.) Pv.II,11⁶ (=punar āneti C.). (Page 384)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccāropeti: {'def': '[paṭi+āropeti] to show in return, retort, explain M.I,96; A.IV,193. Cp. paccabhāsati. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi反+āropeti检举)﹐反诘(to show in return, retort, explain)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccāsanne: {'def': '(adv.) [paṭi+āsanne] near by PvA.216=280 (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+āsanne) ,【副】靠近(near by, PvA.216=280)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccāsati: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+āśā or=paccāsaṁsati or °siṁsati?] to ask, beg, pray Pv IV.5⁶ (°anto for °āsaṁsanto? C. expln^ns by āsiṁsanto). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. paṭi+āwā or=paccāsaṁsati or °siṁsati?), 问、请求(to ask, beg, pray)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccāsiŋsati: {'def': '(pati + ā + siŋs + a), 期待，需要，等候。【过】 ~siŋsi。【过分】 ~siŋsita。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paccāsiṁsati: {'def': '(paṭi+ā+siṁs+a), 期待，需要，等候( to expect, wait for, desire, hope for, ask)。【过】paccāsiṁsi。【过分】paccāsiṁsita。【现分】paccāsīsanta。grd. paccāsīsitabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+āsiṁsati] to expect, wait for, desire, hope for, ask D.II,100; A.III,124; J.I,346, 483; III,176; V,214; DhA.I,14; II,84; DA.I,318; VvA.336, 346; PvA.22, 25, 63, 260. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccāsā: {'def': '(paṭi+ āsā(梵āwā)希望, cp. Sk. pratyāwā),【阴】期待(expectation Vin.IV,286.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'f. [paṭi+āśā, cp. Sk. pratyāśā] expectation Vin.IV,286. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccāsāreti: {'def': '[paṭi+ā+sāreti, Caus. of sṛ] to make go (or turn) backward M.I,124=A.III,28 (=paṭinivatteti C.); Vism.308 (sāreti pi p. pi). (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+ā+sāreti, Caus. of sr)转回(to make go (or turn) backward M.I,124=A.III,28 (=paṭinivatteti C.); Vism.308 (sāreti pi p. pi))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccūha: {'def': '[cp. late Sk. pratyūha, prati+vah] an impediment, obstacle S.I,201 (bahū hi saddā paccūhā, trsl. “Ay there is busy to-and-fro of words.” C. expl^s by paṭiloma-saddā); J.VI,571. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paccūsa: {'def': '【阳】早晨。 ~kāla, 【阳】破晓。(p188)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】早晨。paccūsakāla,【阳】破晓。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccūsasamaya: {'def': '(paccūsa破晓+samaya时【阳】), 破晓时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccūsasamaye: {'def': '(paccūsasamaya破晓时的【单，处】), 在破晓时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paccūsa°: {'def': '[paṭi+Ved. uṣas f.; later Sk. pratyūṣa nt.] “the time towards dawn,” morning, dawn; always. in compⁿ with either °kāle (Loc.) at morning DhA.IV,61; DA.I,168; or °velāyaṁ (Loc.) id. VvA.105, 118, 165; PvA.61; or °samaye (Loc.) id. S.I,107; J.I,81, 217; SnA 80; PvA.38. (Page 385)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacessati: {'def': 'see pacinati. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[pacinati摘] 的【3.单.未】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacinati: {'def': '[or °cināti) [pa+cināti, cp, ācināti] 1. to pick, pluck, gather, take up, collect, accumulate S.III,89; IV,74 (dukkhaṁ=ācināti p. 73); Dh.47, 48 (pupphāni= ocinati DhA.I,366); J.III,22; fut. pacinissati DhA.I,361. -- 2. to pick out (mentally), to discern, distinguish, realise, know Sn.837 (ppr. pacinaṁ=pacinanto vicinanto tulayanto tīrayanto Nd¹ 185;=pavicinati SnA 545); fut. pacessati Dh.44, 45 (sic F.; MSS. vijessati, & vicessati the latter perhaps preferable to pac°; expl^d at DhA.I,334 by vicinissati upaparikkhissati paṭivijjhissati sacchikarissati). -- Pass. pacīyati to be heaped up, to increase, accumulate S.IV,74 (opp. khīyati). (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacināti: {'def': 'pacinati, (pa在前+cināti积聚), 摘，拔去(鸡、鸭等毛)，采集，收集，堆积。【过】pacini。【现分】pacinanta。【3.单.未】pacessati。【现分】pacinanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + ci + nā), 摘，拔去（鸡、鸭等毛），采集，收集，堆积。【过】pacini。【现分】 pacinanta。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pacura: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. late Sk. pracura] general, various, any; abundant, many J.V,40 (=bahu salabha C.); Miln.408 (°jana) Dāvs.IV,11, 50; VvA.213 (°jano for yādisakīdiso Vv 50¹¹). See also pasura. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】丰富的，各种不同的，许多的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】丰富的，各种不同的，许多的。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pacuṭa: {'def': 'is doubtful reading at DA.I,164 (with vv. ll. pamuṭa, pamuca, papuṭa) for D.I,54, T. paṭuva (vv. ll. pamuṭa, samudda) and is expl^d by gaṇṭhika, i. e. block or knot. The whole passage is corrupt; see discussed under pavuṭā. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacālaka: {'def': '【形】【中】摇摆的，震动的。pacālakaṁ,【副】摇动地。kāyappacālaka,【中】摇晃身体。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pacāleti] swinging, shaking; nt. Acc. as adv. in kāya- (& bāhu°) ppacālakaṁ after the manner or in the style of swaying the body (or swinging the arms) Vin.II,213. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】摇摆的，震动的。 ~kaŋ, 【副】摇动地。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pacāleti: {'def': '[pa+Caus. of cal] to swing, sway, move about Th.1, 200 (mā pacālesi “sway and nod” Trslⁿ). (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pacāpeti: {'def': '(pacati 的【使】) 使烹调。【过】pacāpesi。【独】pacāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pacati] to cause to be cooked, to cook Vin.IV,264; J.I,126 (āhāraṁ); II,15 (bhattaṁ), 122. (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pacati 的【使】) 使烹调。【过】 ~esi。【独】 pacāpetvā。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pacāraka: {'def': '【阳】处理者，令人知道者，出版者。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】处理者，令人知道者，出版者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pacāreti: {'def': '(pa+car+e), 处理，广播，出版。【过】pacāresi。【过分】pacārita。【独】pacāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+cāreti, Caus. of car] to go about in (Acc.), to frequent, to visit A.I,182, 183 (pacārayāmi, gloss sañcarissāmi). (Page 383)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + car + e), 处理，广播，出版。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【独】~retvā。(p187)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pada: {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. pad, pād (m.) foot, and also pāda; pada (nt.) step. Cp. Gr. pwζ (pouζ)=Lat. pēs, Goth. fōtus =Ohg fuoz=E. foot; further Arm. het track, Gr. pedά after, pέdon field, pezόs on foot, etc.; Lith. péda track; Ags. fetvan=E. fetch. -- The decl. in Pāli is vocalic (a), viz. pada; a trace of the consonant (root) decl. is Instr. sg. padā (Th.1, 457; Sn.768), of cons. (s) decl. Instr. padasā with the foot, on foot (D.I,107; J.III,371; DhA.I,391). -- Gender is nt., but Nom. pl. is frequently found as padā, e. g. at Dh.273; Nett 192 (mūla°)] 1. foot Dh.273=SnA 366 (? saccānaṁ caturo padā); DA.I,85; usually --°, like hatthipadaṁ elephant’s foot M.I,176, 184; S.I,86; V,43, 231; and with numerals dvi° & di°, catup°, aṭṭha° (q. v.). In aṭṭha° also meaning “square of a chessboard.” -- 2. step, footstep, track Dh.179 (of a Buddha, cp. DhA.III,194 & 197) J.I,170 (footmark) II.154; in redupl.-iterative formation padāpadaṁ step by step Sn.446 (v. l. padânupadaṁ), and pade padaṁ Sn.p. 107 (cp. SnA 451). -- 3. (Often synonymous with °patha i. e. way, kind, & sometimes untranslatable) (a) lit. way, path, position, place Vin.II,217 (nakkhatta° constellation); J.I,315 (assama° =assama); V,75 (id.), 321 (id.); VI,76 (id.); VI,180 (v. l. patha; C. mahāmagga); mantapada=manta D.I,104 (cp. DA.I,273). See also janapada, saggapada. -- (b) in appl^d meaning (modal): case, lot, principle, part, constituent, characteristic, ingredient, item, thing, element M.I,176 (cattāri padāni 4 characteristics); S.I,7 (pade pade “now in this thing, now in that” C. ārammaṇe ārammaṇe), 212 (amataṁ p.=nibbāna); II,280 (id.); A.II,51 (id.), It.39 (p. asaṅkhataṁ=nibbāna); Sn.88 (dhammapade sudesite; expl^d as nibbānadhamma SnA 164; dhammapada=Dhamma), ibid. (anavajja-padāni sevamāna=principles), 700 (moneyyaṁ uttamaṁ padaṁ, thing; but SnA 491 expl^s as uttama-paṭipadaṁ), 765; Dh.21, 93, 114 (amataṁ), 254, 368 (santaṁ=nibbānass’etaṁ nāmaṁ, santakoṭṭhāsaṁ DhA.IV,108); Pv IV.3⁴⁸ (amataṁ); Nett 2= 192 (nava padāni kusalāni); SnA 397 (nāmādi p.); Sdhp.47 (accutaṁ santaṁ p.), 615 (paramaṁ). See further dhamma°, nibbāna°, santi°, sikkhā°. -- 4. a word, verse (or a quarter of a verse), stanza, line, sentence S.II,36 (ekena padena sabbo attho vutto); S.IV,379=A.V,320 (agga°); A.II,182 (+vyañjana & desanā); 189 (attha° text, motto); III,356 (id.); Sn.252 (=dhamma-desanā SnA 293), 374; Dh.273; J.I,72 (atireka-pada-satena); Nett 4 (akkharaṁ padaṁ vyañjanaṁ, cp. nāmādīhi padehi at SnA 397, which is to be understood as nāma, pada & vyañjana, i. e. word, sentence & letter, cp. Mvyutp. 104, 74--76); Miln.148 (āhacca°); KhA 169; SnA 409 (ubhaya°), 444; VvA.3, 13; PvA.10, 26, 117 (word, term). Abl. padaso (adv.) sentence by s^tce or word by word Vin.IV,14 (dhammaṁ vāceti=anupadaṁ C.; cp. KhA 190 p. °dhamma). At MA.I,2 pada (sentence or division of a sentence) is contrasted with akkhara (word), when it is said that the Majjhima Nikāya consists of 80,523 padas and 740,053 akkharas. -- Neg. apada (1) without feet, footless A.IV,434 (Māra; v. l. apara); It.87 (sattā,+ dvipada etc.). -- (2) trackless, leaving no footprint, fig. having no desires (i. e. signs of worldliness) Dh.179 (rāga, etc., as padāni DhA.III,197, but cp. also p. 194.)

--attha meaning of a word KhA 81, 84; SnA 91. --ânupadaṁ (adv.) on the track DhA.II,38. --ânupadika following one’s footsteps J.II,78; DhA.II,94 (therānaṁ); nt. adv. °ṁ close behind DhA.I,290. --ānupubbatā (or °ta) succession of words Nd¹ 140 (in explⁿ of “iti”; cp. SnA 28); Nd² 137 (id.; reading °ka). --uddhāra synopsis of a verse SnA 237 (atthuddhāra+). --kusala clever at following a trail J.III,501, 505. --cārikā a female (foot-) servant J.IV,35. --cetiya “step-shrine,” a holy footprint, a miraculous footprint left on the ground by a holy man DhA.III,194. --ccheda separation of words, parsing SnA 150. --jāta (nt.) pedal character S.I,86. --ṭṭhāna [cp. Sk. padasthāna footprint] “proximate cause” (Cpd. 13, 23) Nett 1 sq., 27 sq., 40 sq., 104; Vism.84. --dvaya twofold part (of a phrase), i. e. antecedent and subsequent DhsA.164. --parama one whose highest attainment is the word (of the text, and not the sense of it) A.II,135; J.VI,131; Pug.41 (“vyañjanapadam eva paramaṁ assā ti” PugA 223. --pāripūrī (f.) expletive particle Nd² 137; SnA 28. --pūraṇa filling out a verse; as tt. g. expletive particle SnA 590 (a), 139 (kho), 137 (kho pana), 378 (tato), 536 (pi), 230 (su), 416 (ha), 377 (hi); KhA 219 (tam), 188 (su); VvA.10 (maya). --bhājana dividing of words, i. e. treating each word (of a phrase) separately DhsA.234. --bhājaniya division of a phrase DhsA.54. --bhāṇa reciting or preaching (the words of the Scriptures) DhA.II,95; III,345; IV,18. --vaṇṇanā explⁿ of a pada or single verse SnA 65, 237; KhA 125, 132, 228. --valañja a footprint, track J.VI,560; DhA.II,38; III,194. --viggaha separation of words, resolution of a compound into its components VvA.326. --vibhāga separation of words, parsing SnA 269; PvA.34. --saṁsagga contact of words Nd¹ 139; Nd² 137; SnA 28. --sadda sound of footsteps Sn.p. 80; J.IV,409. --sandhi euphonic combination of words Nd¹ 445; Nd² 137; KhA 155, 224; SnA 28, 40, 157 etc.; PvA.52. --silā a stone for stepping on, flag Vin.II,121=154. (Page 408)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.脚[迹]。2.路，位置，地方。3.句，一句话，一行诗节。4.理由，因素。padaṭṭhāna,【中】最接近的因素(近因)。padacetiya,【中】神圣的脚印。padajāta,【中】种种的脚印。padapūraṇa,【中】虚词。padabhājana,【中】词句的划分，每个字分开来论述。padabhāṇaka,【形】背诵圣经的人。padavaṇṇanā,【阴】逐字解释。padavalañja,【中】足迹，脚印。padavibhāga,【阳】字的区别，剖析。padavītihāra,【阳】步骤的交换。padasadda,【阳】脚步声。padasamācāra,【阳】礼节(MA.69.)CS:p.3.128)：padasamācāroti dubbalasamācāro oḷārikācāro (礼节：粗行、细行))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】脚，脚步，一句话，位置，地方，理由，因素，一行诗节，最后的休息。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】最接近的因素。 ~cetiya, 【中】神圣的脚印。~jāta, 【中】种种的脚印。 ~pūraṇa, 【中】虚词。 ~bhājana, 【中】词句的划分，每个字分开来论述。 ~ bhāṇaka, 【形】背诵圣经的人。 ~vaṇṇanā , 【阴】字的解释。 ~valañja, 【中】足迹，脚印。 ~vibhāga, 【阳】字的区别，剖析。 ~vītihāra, 【阳】步骤的交换。 ~sadda, 【阳】脚步声。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padahana: {'def': '【中】努力，尽力。参考 Padhāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】参考 Padhāna。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see padhāna. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padahati: {'def': '(pa + dah + a), 努力，着手进行，面对。【过】 padahi。【过分】~hita。【独】 ~hitvā。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+dhā] 1. to strive, exert D.III,221 (cittaṁ paggaṇhāti p.); PvA.31 (yoniso p.). -- 2. to confront, take up, fight against, stand J.VI,508 (usīraṁ muñjapubbajaṁ urasā padahessāmi “I shall stand against the grasses with my chest”; C. expl^s by dvedhā katvā purato gamissāmi, i. e. break and go forward). ‹-› Note. padahasi at J.IV,383 read pade hasi (see Windisch, Māra & B. p. 124 & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 51. Windisch takes padahasi as pa+dah to burn, & translates “du willst das Feuer brennen,” i. e. you attempt something impossible, because the fire will burn you). -- pp. pahita (q. v.). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa彻底+dah放置+a), 努力(直译：彻底放置)，著手进行，面对。【过】padahi。【过分】padahita。【独】padahitvā。tulayitvā padahati, pahitattho samāno kayena c’eva paramaṁ saccaṁ sacchikaroti paññāya ca naṁ ativijjha passati(考量已精勤，因为有精勤，以身作证第一谛，以慧精密地观察它。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padaka: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [fr. pada⁴] one who knows the padas (words or lines), versed in the padapāṭha of the Veda (Ep. Of an educated Brahmin) D.I,88=Sn.p. 105 (where AvŚ II.19 in id. p. has padaśo=P. padaso word by word, but Divy 620 reads padako; ajjheti vedeti cā ti padako); M.I,386; A.I,163, 166; Sn.595; Miln.10, 236. (Page 408)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. pada¹] in cpd. aṭṭha° an “eight-foot,” i. e. a small inset square (cp. aṭṭha-pada chess-board), a patch (?) Vin.I,297. See also padika. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.)=pada 3, viz. basis, principle or pada 4, viz. stanza, line J.V,116 (=kāraṇa-padāni C.). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (fr. pada4),通文句(one who knows the padas (words or lines), versed in the padapāṭha of the Veda (Ep. Of an educated Brahmin) D.I,88=Sn.p. 105 (where AvW II.19 in id. p. has padawo=P. padaso word by word, but Divy 620 reads padako; ajjheti vedeti cā ti padako); M.I,386; A.I,163, 166; Sn.595; Miln.10, 236.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padakkhiṇa: {'def': '(pa在前+dakkhiṇa右),【形】右绕(两手合掌向尊敬的人右绕三圈，依顺时钟方向行走。此为印度人表达极大敬意。)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pa+dakkhiṇa] 1. “to the right,” in phrase padakkhiṇaṁ karoti (with Acc. of object) to hold (a person, etc.) to one’s right side, i. e. to go round so as to keep the right side turned to a person, a mode of reverential salutation Vin.I,17; S.I,138; A.I,294; II,21, 182; III,198; Sn.1010; J.I,50, 60; III,392. ‹-› 2. “(prominent) with the right,” i. e. skilful, clever, quick in learning J.IV,469 (=susikkhita C.). -- 3. lucky, auspicious, turning out well or favourable J.V,353 (=sukha-nipphattin vuddhi-yutta C.).

--ggāhin “right-handed,” i. e. cleverly taking up (what is taught), good at grasping or understanding A.III,79, 180, V,24 sq., 90, 338; DhA.II,105. -- Opp. appadakkhiṇaggāhin “left-handed,” unskilled, untrained (cp. Ger. “linkisch”) S.II,204 sq.; J.III,483. --ggāhitā skilfulness, quick grasp, cleverness KhA 148. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padakkhiṇā: {'def': '【阴】绕圈子，绕佛，行绕礼（以右肩向着尊敬的人或物件绕着走）。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】右绕，绕佛，行右绕礼。古印度有「右尊左卑」，中国也有这种思想。S.16.6./II,204.︰“…appadakkhiṇaggāhino anusāsaniṁ.(不能随教授率直执受。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padaparama: {'def': '【形】文句为最者，可以根据修行的阶段，细分为许多类别，包括了必须修习七日禅的行者(处於最精进状态)，乃至於必须修习长达数十年，才可能证得阿罗汉的。年轻时修习可证得阿罗汉果，到老年时可能只能证得较低层的果位。Pug.PTS:p.41.︰151. Katamo ca puggalo padaparamo? Yassa puggalassa bahumpi suṇato bahumpi bhaṇato bahumpi dhārayato bahumpi vācayato na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hoti– ayaṁ vuccati puggalo “padaparamo”.(什么人是‘文句为最者’呢？哪个人有多闻、多说、多忆持、多教导，他没有在此生中法现观，这个人被称为‘文句为最者’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padara: {'def': '(nt.) [pa+dara of dṛ, cp. dabba, darati, dāru] 1. a cleft, split, fissure, crevice M.I,469; S.II,32; Sn.720 (=darī SnA 500); comb^d with kandara at Miln.36, 296, 411; PvA.29. -- 2. a board, plank J.II,10 91 (°sakaṭa) 112; III,181; V,47 sq.; VI,432 (°cchanna); SnA 330 (dabba° oar), 355; DhA.II,55; III,296. -- 3. Wrong spelling for badara at J.IV,363 (beluvā p°āni ca) & VI,529.

--sañcita filled with clefts (?) Vin.IV,46. --samācāra refractiousness, disobedience (?) M.I,469. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】木板。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】木板。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padatta: {'def': '(padāti 的【过分】), 已放弃，已分配。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(padāti 的【过分】), 已放弃，已分配。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. pada] being or constituting a lot, part or element SnA 164. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paddha: {'def': '² (adj.) [cp. Sk. prārdha] half (?) J.III,95 (probably =paddha¹, but C. expl^ns as aḍḍha upaḍḍha). (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [cp. Sk. prādhva (?) in diff. meaning “being on a journey,” but rather prahva] 1. expert in (Loc.) J.VI,476 (v. l. patha=paṭṭha; C. cheko paṭibalo). ‹-› 2. subject to, serving, attending J.IV,35 (p. carāmi, so read for baḍḍha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.; C. padacārikā). (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paddhacara: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [paddha¹+cara, cp. Sk. prādhva and prahva humble] ready to serve, subject to, ministering; a servant S.I,144 (T. baddhacara, v. l. paṭṭha°; trsl. “pupil”); J.IV,35 (read paddhacarā’smi tuyhaṁ for T. baddha carāmi t., as pointed out by Kern, Toev. s. v. baddha. The Cy. misunderstood the wrong text reading and expl^d as “tuyhaṁ baddha carāmi,” but adds “veyyāvaccakārikā padacārikā”); V,327 (as baddhañcara; C. veyyāvacca-kara); VI,268 (°ā female servant=C. pāda-paricārikā); Nd¹ 464 (+paricārika); SnA 597 (+paricāraka, for paddhagū). (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paddhagu: {'def': '(adj. n.) [cp. Sk. prādhvaga] 1. going, walking J.III,95 (T. na p’addhaguṁ, but C. reads paddhaguṁ). -- 2. humble, ready to serve, servant, attendant, slave S.I,104 (so read for paccagu); Sn.1095 (T. for paṭṭhagu, q. v. -- Nd² reads paṭṭhagu but SnA 597 paddhagu and expl^ns by paddhacara paricārika); J.VI,380 (hadayassa); Th.1, 632. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pade: {'def': 'pade (‹pada足[迹] ), 一步又一步。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padesa: {'def': '[fr. pa+diś, cp. late Sk. pradeśa] indication, location, range, district; region, spot, place S.II,227, 254; V,201; A.II,167 (cattāro mahā°); Dh.127 (jagati°), 303; J.II,3, 158 (Himavanta°); III,25 (id.), 191 (jāti-gottakula°); SnA 355; PvA.29, 33 (hadaya°), 36 (so read for padase), 43, 47; Sdhp.252.

--kārin effecting a limited extent S.V,201. --ñāṇa knowledge within a certain range, limited knowledge S.V,457. --bodhisatta a limited Bodhisatta Kvu 283 (cp. Kvu trslⁿ 139³, 166²). --rajja principality over a district, local government It.15; ThA.26 (Ap. v. 10). --rājā a local or sub-king Vism.301 (cakkavatti+). --lakkhaṇa regional or limited characteristics Kvu 283. --vassin raining or shedding rain only locally or over a (limited) district It.64--66. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】区域，地方，管区，位置，地点。 ~ñāṇa, 【中】有限制的知识。 ~rajja, 【中】在一个区域上的侯国。 ~rāja, 【阳】副王。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.指示(indication)。2.地方(location)，范围(range)，区域、地域(台语︰te7 ek8)(district、region)，位置(spot)，地点(place)。padesañāṇa,【中】有限制的知识。padesarajja,【中】在一个区域上的侯国。padesarāja,【阳】副王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padesavattin: {'def': '(padesa指示+vattin转动),【形】转动指示。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padesika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. padesa] belonging to a place of indication, indicating, regional, reaching the index of, only with numerals in reference to age (usually soḷasavassa° at the time of 16 years) J.I,259 (id.) 262 (id.) II.277 (id.). -- See also uddesika in same application. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhana: {'def': '(= padahana), 【中】努力，尽力。 ~ghara, 【中】为修禅而备的(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】领袖，最初的。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padhansita: {'def': '[pp. of padhaṁseti] offended, assaulted J.II,422. See also app°. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhaŋsa: {'def': '【阳】 ~sana, 【中】毁灭，违反，冒犯，抢夺。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padhaŋseti: {'def': '(pa + dhaŋs + e), 破坏，袭击，掠夺，冒犯。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】 ~setva。【现分】 ~senta。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padhaŋsita: {'def': '【过分】破坏。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padhaŋsiya: {'def': '【形】易受侵犯，易受袭击，易受掠夺。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padhaṁsa: {'def': 'see appadhaṁsa. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】padhaṁsana,【中】毁灭，违反，冒犯，抢夺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padhaṁsati: {'def': '[pa+dhaṁsati] to fall from (Abl.), to be deprived of Vin.II,205 (yogakkhemā p.; so read for paddh°). -- Caus. padhaṁseti to destroy, assault, violate, offend J.IV,494. (=jīvitakkhayaṁ pāpeti); PvA.117. ‹-› grd. padhaṁsiya in cpds. su° & dup° easily (or with difficulty) overwhelmed or assaulted Vin.II,256= S.II,264. Also neg. appadhaṁsiya (& °ka) (q. v.). ‹-› pp. padhaṁsita (q. v.). (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhaṁseti: {'def': '(pa+dhaṁs+e), 破坏，袭击，掠夺，冒犯。【过】padhaṁsesi。【过分】padhaṁsita。【独】padhaṁsetvā。【现分】padhaṁsenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padhaṁsita: {'def': '【过分】破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padhaṁsiya: {'def': '【形】易受侵犯，易受袭击，易受掠夺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padhota: {'def': '(padhovati的【过分】) 已彻底地洗，已彻底地削尖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pa+dhota] cleansed, in cpd. sup° well cleansed D.II,324. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhāna: {'def': '【形】领袖，最初的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(=padahana)﹐【中】努力，尽力。padhānaghara﹐【中】禅堂。padhānika﹐【形】努力修禅的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(= padahana),【中】努力，尽力。padhānaghara,【中】为修禅而备的。padhānasaṅkhārā,勤行：SA.51.13.：Padhānasaṅkhārāti padhānabhūtā saṅkhārā, catukiccasādhakasammappadhānavīriyassetaṁ adhivacanaṁ.(勤行：变更勤行，这是完成四事勤(四正勤)的精进的同义词。) cattāri padhānāni, 四勤(four efforts)︰saṁvara-padhānaṁ 律仪勤 (the effort to avoid (unwholesome states))，pahāna-padhānaṁ 断勤 (the effort to overcome (unwholesome states))，bhāvanā-padhānaṁ 修勤 (the effort to develop (wholesome states))，anurakkhaṇā-padhānaṁ 随护勤 (the effort to maintain (wholesome states))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+dhā, cp. padahati] exertion, energetic effort, striving, concentration of mind D.III,30, 77, 104, 108, 214, 238; M.II,174, 218; S.I,47; II,268; IV,360; V,244 sq.; A.III,65--67 (5 samayā and 5 asamayā for padhāna), 249; IV,355; V,17 sq.; Sn.424, 428; It.30; Dh.141; J.I,90; Nd² 394 (=viriya); Vbh.218 (citta-samādhi p° etc.); Nett 16; DA.I,104; DhA.I,85 (mahā-padhānaṁ padahitvā); ThA.174; PvA.134. Padhāna is fourfold, viz. saṁvara°, pahāna°, bhāvana°, anurakkhaṇā° or exertion consisting in the restraint of one’s senses, the abandonment of sinful thoughts, practice of meditation & guarding one’s character. These 4 are mentioned at D.III,225; A.II,16; Ps.I,84; II,14 sq., 56, 86, 166, 174; Ud.34; Nd¹ 45, 340; Sdhp.594. ‹-› Very frequently termed sammappadhāna [cp. BSk. samyak-pradhāna MVastu III,120; but also samyakprahāṇa, e. g. Divy 208] or “right exertion,” thus at Vin.I,22; S.I,105; III,96 (the four); A.II,15 (id.); III,12; IV,125; Nd¹ 14; Ps.I,21, 85, 90, 161; SnA 124; PvA.98. -- As padahana at Ps.I,17, 21, 181. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhānavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. padhāna] gifted with energy, full of strength (of meditation etc.), rightly concentrated S.I,188, 197; Sn.70 (cp. Nd² 394), 531. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhānika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. padhāna] making efforts, exerting oneself in meditation, practising “padhāna” DA.I,251. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhāniya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. padhāna] belonging to or connected with exertion, worthy of being pursued in cpd. °aṅga (nt.) a quality to be striven after, of which there are 5, expressed in the attributes of one who attains them as saddho, appābādho, asaṭho, āraddha-viriyo, paññavā D.III,237=M.II,95, 128=A.III,65; referred to at Miln.trslⁿ I.188. Besides these there is the set called pārisuddhi-padhāniy’ aṅgāni and consisting either of 4 qualities (sīla°, citta°, diṭṭhi°, vimutti°) A.II,194, or of 9 (the four+kaṅkhā-vitaraṇa°, maggâmagga-ñāṇa° paṭipadāñāṇa-dassana°, ñāṇa-dassana° paññā°) D.III,288; Ps.I,28. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhārita: {'def': '(“born in mind”) read patthārita at Th.1, 842 (see pattharati). -- padhārehi (v. l. F.) at Sn.1149 read dhārehi. -- padhārita in meaning of “considered, understood” in cpd. su° at S.III,6; V,278. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhāvana: {'def': '【中】，跑出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padhāvati: {'def': '(pa+dhāv+a)﹐跑出、奔前(runs out or forth)。【过】padhāvi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+dhāvati] to run out or forth Pv III,1⁷ (ger. °itvā=upadhāvitvā PvA.173). (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. padhāvati] rushing or running out or forth M.II,98. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhūpeti: {'def': '(pa+dhup+e) 薰制(肉、鱼等)。参考dhūpeti, see dhūpeti.【过分】padhūpita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padhūpita: {'def': '[pa+dhūpita, latter only in meaning “incensed,” cp. dhūpa etc.] fumigated, reeking, smoked out S.I,133 (trsl^d “racked [wrapt] in flames”; C. santāpita); VvA.237 (so read with v. l. SS. for T. pavūsita; meaning: scented, filled with scent). (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padhūpāti: {'def': '(=padhūpāyati) [pa+dhūpāyati] to blow forth smoke or flames Vin.I,25 (aor. padhūpāsi); IV,109 (id.); Vism.400 (id.), (so read for padhūmāsi T., v. l. SS padhūpāyi & padhūmāyi). -- pp. padhūpita (q. v.). (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pada 1; cp. padaka³] consisting of feet or parts, --fold; dvādasa° twelve fold J.I,75 (paccayākāra). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】由诗节所组成的。【阳】行人。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】由诗节所组成的。【阳】行人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padippati: {'def': '(pa + dip + ya), 燃烧，（激情、怒火）爆发。【过】 ~ppi。【现分】 ~pamāna。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+dippati] to flame forth, to blaze Cp III 9³ (davaḍāho p.). -- pp. paditta (q. v.). -- Caus. padīpeti (q. v.). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+dip+ya), 燃烧，(激情、怒火)爆发。【过】padippi。【现分】padippamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padissa: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of padissati] being seen, to be seen, appearing D.II,205 (upasantappa°). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padissati: {'def': '(pa + dis + ya), 被看到，出现。【过】 ~dissi。【过分】 padiṭṭha。【现分】 ~samāna。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+dissati, Pass. of dṛś] to be seen Sn.108 (doubtful; v. l. padussati; expl^d at SnA 172 by paṭidissati, v. l. padussati, cp. p. 192); Cp I.10² J.VI,89; Sdhp.427. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+dis指出+ya), 被看到，出现。【过】padissi。【过分】padiṭṭha。【现分】padissamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paditta: {'def': '[pp. of pa+dīp, cp. Sk. pradīpta] kindled, set on fire, blazing S.III,93 ≈ (chav’âlataṁ ubhato padittaṁ); J.VI,108; Sdhp.208 (°aṅgārakāsuṁ). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Padippati的【过分】) 燃烧，爆发。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padma: {'def': '【中】红莲花。参考 Paduma。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Paduma。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see paduma. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padmaka: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [Sk. padmaka] N. of a tree, Costus speciosus or arabicus J.V,405, 420; VI,497 (reading uncertain), 537. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padosa: {'def': '¹ [pa+dosa¹, Sk. pradoṣa] defect, fault, blemish, badness, corruption, sin D.I,71 (=padussati paraṁ vā padūseti vināsetī ti padoso DA.I,211); M.III,3; S.IV,322 (vyāpāda°); A.I,8 (ceto°); III,92 (vyāpāda); It.12; J.V,99; Pug.59, 68; Dhs.1060. -- Note. At ThA.72 we find reading “apace paduse (padose?) pi ca” as uncertain conjecture for v. l. BB “amacce manase pi ca.” (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pa+dosa², Sk. pradveṣa, see remarks to dosa²] anger, hatred, ill-will; always as mano° “anger in mind” M.I,377; Sn.328 (=khāṇu-kaṇṭak’ādimhi p. SnA 334), 702; J.IV,29; Miln.130; Vism.304; SnA 477. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 傍晚。 2. 激怒。 3. 缺点，污点。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2(pa+dosa2憎, 梵pradosa、pradvesa, see remarks to dosa2)﹐激怒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(pa+dosa1, 梵pradosa),【阳】缺点，污点，瑕疵。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padoseti: {'def': 'see padūseti. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padosika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. padosa¹] sinful, spoiling or spoilt, full of fault or corruption, only in 2 phrases, viz. khiḍḍā° “debauched by pleasure” D.I,19; and mano° “debauched in mind” D.I,20, 21. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padosin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. padosa¹] abusing, damaging, spoiling, injuring S.I,13 (appaduttha°); Pv IV.7¹⁰. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padubbhati: {'def': '(pa+dubh+ya), 谋反。【过】padubbhi。【过分】padubbhita。【独】padubbhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + dubh + ya), 谋反。【过】 ~bhi。【过分】 ~bhita。【独】~bhitvā。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+dubbhati] to do wrong, offend, plot against J.I,262 (ger. °dubbhitvā). (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padulla: {'def': '[?] in cpd. padulla-gāhin is perhaps misreading; trsl. “clutching at blown straws (of vain opinion),” expl^d by C. as duṭṭhullagāhin; at id. p. S.I,187 we find duṭṭhullabhāṇin “whose speech is never lewd” (see Psalms of Brethren 399, n. 3). (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paduma: {'def': '【中】红莲花，红莲地狱（地狱的名字），一个巨大的数字名（10,000,00017, 119 个 0 数位）。 ~kaṇṇika, 【阴】睡莲的果皮。 ~kalapa, 【阳】一束睡莲。 ~gabbha, 【阳】睡莲之内部。 ~patta, 【中】莲花瓣。 ~raga, 【阳】红宝石。 ~sara, 【阳、中】莲池。 ~minī, 【阴】红睡莲（植物）。 ~mimīpatta, 【中】莲叶。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. padma, not in RV.] the lotus Nelumbium speciosum. It is usually mentioned in two varieties, viz. ratta° and seta°, i. e. red and white lotus, so at J.V,37; SnA 125; as ratta° at VvA.191; PvA.157. The latter seems to be the more prominent variety; but paduma also includes the 3 other colours (blue, yellow, pink?), since it frequently has the designation of pañcavaṇṇa-paduma (the 5 colours however are nowhere specified), e. g. at J.I,222; V,337; VI,341; VvA.41. It is further classified as satapatta and sahassapatta-p., viz. lotus with 100 & with 1,000 leaves: VvA.191. Compared with other species at J.V,37, where 7 kinds are enum^d as uppala (blue, red & white), paduma (red & white), kumuda (white) and kallahāra. See further kamala and kuvalaya. -- (1) the lotus or lotus flower M.III,93; S.I,138, 204; A.I,145; II,86 sq.; III,26, 239; Sn.71, 213; J.I,51 (daṇḍa° N. of a plant, cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala), 76 (khandha°, latā°, daṇḍaka°, olambaka°); IV,3; VI,564; Dh.458; Nd¹ 135; Vv 35⁴ (=puṇḍarīka VvA.161); 44¹² (nānā-paduma-sañchanna); Pv.II,1²⁰ (id.); II,12² (id.); Pug.63; Vism.256 (ratta°); DA.I,219; KhA 53; SnA 97; Sdhp.359. -- (2) N. of a purgatory (°niraya) S.I,151--152; Sn.677; p. 126; SnA 475 sq.

--acchara (heavenly) lotus-maiden SnA 469. --uttara N. of Buddha SnA 341, 455 etc. --kaṇṇikā a peak in the shape of a lotus VvA.181. --kalāpa a bunch of lotuses VvA.191. --gabbha the calyx of a l. ThA.68 (°vaṇṇa). --patta a l. leaf Nd¹ 135 (=pokkhara); DhA.IV,166 (=pokkhara-patta). --puñja a l. cluster J.III,55. --puppha a lotus flower Nd² 393; SnA 78. --rāga “lotus hued,” a ruby VvA.276. --vyūha one of the 3 kinds of fighting, viz. p.°; cakka°, sakaṭa° J.II,406= IV.343 (cp. Sk. p.-vyūha-samādhi a kind of concentration, & see J trslⁿ II.275). --sara a lotus pond J.I,221; V,337; SnA 141. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】红莲花，红莲地狱(地狱的名字)，一个巨大的数位名。padumakaṇṇika,【阴】睡莲的果皮。padumakalapa,【阳】一束睡莲。padumagabbha,【阳】睡莲之内部。padumapatta,【中】莲花瓣。padumaraga,【阳】红宝石。padumasara,【阳】【中】莲池。paduminī,【阴】红睡莲(植物)。padumīpatta,【中】莲叶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paduma niraya: {'def': '红莲花地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Padumaka: {'def': '[fr. paduma] 1. the Paduma purgatory S.I,152. -- 2. a lotus J.II,325. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padumin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [cp. Sk. padmin, spotted elephant] having a lotus, belonging to a lotus, lotus-like; N. of (the spotted) elephant Sn.53 (expl^d at SnA 103 as “padumasadisa-gattatāya vā Padumakule uppannatāya vā padumī,” cp. Nd² p. 164). -- f. paduminī [cp. Sk. padminī lotus plant] 1. a lotus pond of pool of lotuses D.I,75; II,38; M.III,93; S.I,138; A.III,26. -- 2. the lotus plant Nelumbium speciosum J.I,128 (°paṇṇa); IV,419 (°patta); SnA 369; KhA 67 (°patta); PvA.189. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padumī: {'def': '【形】有睡莲的，有斑点的(象)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有睡莲的，有斑点的（象）。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padussana: {'def': '【中】冒犯，谋反。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】冒犯，谋反。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padussati: {'def': '(pa + dus + ya), 犯错，违犯，变坏。【过】 ~ssi。【过分】 paduṭṭha,【独】 ~ssitva。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+dussati] to do wrong, offend against (with Loc.), make bad, corrupt DA.I,211 (see padosa); Sn.108 (v. l. for padissati); aor. padussi J.II,125, 401. -- pp. paduṭṭha; Caus. padūseti (q. v.). (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+dus +ya), 犯错，违犯，变坏。【过】padussi。【过分】paduṭṭha,【独】padussitva。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paduṭṭha: {'def': '(padussati 的【过分】), 已坏，已腐败，已污染，彻底污染。paduṭṭha-bhari【阴】﹐恶妻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(padussati 的【过分】), 已坏，已腐败。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of padussati] made bad, spoilt, corrupt, wicked, bad (opp. pasanna, e. g. at A.I,8; It.12, 13) D.III,32 (°citta); M.III,49; A.II,30; Sn.662; Dh.1; J.II,401; DhA.I,23 (opp. pasanna); PvA.34, 43 (°manasa). --appaduṭṭha good, not corrupt D.I,20; III,32; M.III,50; S.I,13; Pv IV.7¹⁰. (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padvāra: {'def': '(nt.) [pa+dvāra] a place before a door or gate J.V,433; VI,327.

--gāma suburb Dāvs.V, 3. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padālana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. padāleti] cleaving, bursting open, breaking Nett 61, 112 (mohajāla°); ThA.34 (mohakkhandha°). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】裂开，劈开，撕裂处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padāletar: {'def': '[n. ag. to padāleti] one who pierces or destroys, a destroyer, breaker, in phrase mahato kāyassa padāletā the destroyer of a great body (or bulk) A.I,284 sq. (in sequence dūre-pātin, akkhaṇavedhin, m. k. p.); II,170 sq., 202; cp. padāleti¹. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padāleti: {'def': '(pa+dal爆炸﹑冲+e), 劈开，切开，爆裂开。【过】padālesi。【过分】padālita。【现分】padālenta。【独】padāletvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pa+dal] 1. to cleave, break, pierce, destroy, in combⁿ °khandhaṁ padāleti to destroy the great mass of . . ., e. g. tamo° It.8 (padālayuṁ); Th.2, 28 (ger. padāliya=moha° padālitvā ThA.34); lobha° S.V,88; avijjā° A.I,285. -- 2. to break, break down, tear down, burst open J.I,73 (pabbata-kūṭāni); IV,173 (matthakaṁ p°etvā uṭṭhita-singā); V,68 (silāya matthakaṁ); Miln.332 (diṭṭhi-jālaṁ); DA.I,37 (Sineruṁ). See also sam° -- pp. padālita (q. v.). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padāletu: {'def': '【阳】切开者，砸开者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padālita: {'def': '[pp. of padāleti] broken, pierced, destroyed S.I,130; III,83; A.V,88 (appadālita-pubbaṁ lobhakkhandhaṁ); Sn.546 (āsavā te p.; quoted at VvA.9); ThA.34 (as A. V,88 with moha°). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padālitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. padālita] the fact of having (med.) or being (pass.) pierced or broken, Abl. padālitattā on account of having broken Miln.287. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padāna: {'def': '(‹[pa出﹑彻底﹑在前]+[dā给与﹑施] ),【中】给，授予。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+dā] giving, bestowing; but appears to have also the meaning of “attainment, characteristic, attribute” A.I,102 (bāla° & paṇḍita°); J.I,97 (sotāpattimagg’ādi°); PvA.71 (anubala°); ThA.35 (anupattidhammatā°). -- At Th.1, 47 Kern (Toev. II.138) proposes to read tuyhaṁ padāne for T. tuyh’âpadāne, and translates padāna by “footstep, footprint.” See also sampadāna. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】给，授予。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padāraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [pa+dṛ] splitting, tearing Th.1, 752. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padātar: {'def': '[n. ag. of padāti] extravagant, a squanderer Pdgp. 65, 68. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padātave: {'def': '【不】给。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【不】给。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padāti: {'def': '(padadāti, padeti) [pa+dā] 1. to give, bestow Pv.I,11⁶ (ger. padatvā, perhaps better to read ca datvā, as v. l. BB); J.III,279 (fut. padassati); V,394 (id.). ‹-› 2. to acquire, take, get J.I,190 (inf. padātave, C. gahetuṁ). -- Pass padīyati (q. v.). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padātu: {'def': '【阳】施主，送礼者，分配者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】施主，送礼者，分配者。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padāḷana: {'def': '【中】裂开，劈开，撕裂处。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padāḷeti: {'def': '(pa + dār + e), 劈开，切开，爆裂开。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ḷita。【现分】 ~ḷenta。【独】 ~ḷetvā。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padāḷetu: {'def': '【阳】切开者，砸开者。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padīpa: {'def': '【阳】灯，光。padīpakāla,【阳】点灯的时间。padīpeyya,【中】点灯的材料。Dhp.166︰Ko nu hāso kimānando, niccaṁ pajjalite sati. Andhakārena onaddhā, padīpaṁ na gavessatha?(为何笑.为何喜？常存在燃烧；黑暗所系缚，(你们)何不寻求灯(Dhp.A.=智灯)？)(世上有十一种火常在燃烧，贪rāga、瞋dosa、痴moha、病vyadhi、老jarā、死maraṇa、愁soka、悲parideva、苦dukkha、忧domanasa、恼upāyāsa。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】灯，光。 ~kāla, 【阳】点灯的时间。 ~peyya, 【中】点灯的材料。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. pradīpa] 1. a light Dh.146; Vv 46² (jalati blazes); Tikp 14; Miln.40; VvA.51 (padīpaṁ ujjāletvā lighting a lamp, making a light); PvA.38; Sdhp.250. -- 2. a lamp Sn.235 (nibbanti dhīrā yath’âyaṁ p.); DhA.II,163 (anupādāno viya p.). °ṁ karoti to make a light, to light up Vin.I,118; °ṁ ujjāleti see under 1. Usually as tela-padīpa an oil lamp Vin.I,15; S.II,86 (telañ ca vaṭṭiñ ca telapadīpo jhāyati)=IV.213; V,319; A.I,137; VvA.198. --appadīpa where there is no light, obscure Vin.IV,268.

--kāla lighting time Vv 9⁶. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padīpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of padippati] to light a light or a lamp Vin.I,118 (padīpeyya, padīpetabba); Miln.40; ThA.72 (Ap. v. 46); Sdhp.63, 332, 428. -- pp. padīpita (q. v.). (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+dip+e), 点灯，解释，使激烈。【过】padīpesi。【过分】padīpita。【现分】padīpenta。【独】padīpetva。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + dip + e), 点灯，解释，使激烈。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【现分】 ~penta。【独】 ~petva。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Padīpita: {'def': '[pp. of padīpeti] lit, burning, shining Miln.40. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padīpiya: {'def': '& Padīpeyya (nt.) [padīpa+(i) ya] that which is connected with lighting, material for lighting a lamp, lamps & accessories; one of the gifts forming the stock of requisites of a Buddhist mendicant (see Nd² 523: yañña as deyyadhamma). The form in °eyya is the older and more usual one, thus at A.II,85, 203; IV,239; It.65; Pug.51; VvA.51. -- The form in °iya at Vv 22⁵, 26⁶, 37⁶; J.VI,315; VvA.295. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padīyati: {'def': '(pa + da + i + ya), 被分发，被赠送。【过】 padīyi。【过分】 padinna。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+da+i+ya), 被分发，被赠送。【过】padīyi。【过分】padinna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Pass. of padāti] to be given out or presented; Pv.II,9¹⁶; Sdhp.502, 523. (Page 409)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Padūseti: {'def': '(pa + dus + e), 弄脏，污染，破坏，堕落。【过】 ~esi。【过分】padūsita。【独】 ~setva。(p201)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Padoseti [Caus. of padussati, but the latter probably denom. fr. padosa²] to defile, pollute, spoil, make bad or corrupt [cp. BSk. pradūṣyati cittaṁ Divy 197, 286] D.I,20; M.I,129; It.86; DA.I,211 (see padosa¹); ThA.72 (Ap. V, 40; to be read for paduse, Pot.=padoseyya); J.V,273 (manaṁ p., for upahacca). --padusseti read also at A.IV,97 for padasseti (dummaṅku ‘yam padusseti dhūm’aggimhi va pāvako). -- As padoseti at PvA.212 (cittāni padosetvā) and in stock phrase manaṁ padosaye (Pot.) in sense of “to set upon anger” (cp. padosa²) S.I,149 (“sets his heart at enmity”)=A.II,3; V,171, 174=Sn.659 (=manaṁ padoseyya SnA 477)= Nett 132; S.IV,70; SnA 11 (mano padoseyya). -- pp. padūsita (q. v.). (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+dus+e), 弄脏，污染，破坏，堕落。【过】padūsesi。【过分】padūsita。【独】padūsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Padūsita: {'def': '[pp. of padūseti] made bad, corrupted, spoilt It.13 (v. l. padussita). (Page 410)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pagabbha: {'def': '【形】大胆的，勇敢的，不计后果的。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】大胆的，勇敢的，不计后果的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. pragalbha] bold, daring, forward, reckless M.I,236; S.I,201 (sup°); A.III,433; Sn.89, 852 (ap°=na pagabbha KhA 242, cp. also Nd¹ 228); Dh.244 (=kāyapāgabbhiyâdīhi samannāgata DhA.III,354); J.II,32, 281, 359; V,448; Miln.389; Dāvs III,26. -- apagabbha at Vin. III,3 is used in quite a diff. sense, viz. “one who has no more connection with a womb” (a+pa+*garbha) (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pagabbhatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. pagabbha, cp. Sk. pragalbhatā] resoluteness, boldness, decision J.VI,273. See also pāgabbhiya. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pagabbhin: {'def': '(adj.) [=pagabbha] bold J.VI,238. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pagama: {'def': '[fr. pra+gam] going forth from (-°) DhsA.329. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pagaṇḍaka: {'def': 'see pakaṭṭhaka. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pageva: {'def': '(adv.) [Page=Sk. prage+eva, but BSk. prāgeva] (how) much more or much less, a fortiori, lit. “right at the earliest” J.I,354; V,242; Miln.91; Vism.93, 259, 322; VvA.258, PvA.115, 116, 117. -- Compar. Pagevataraṁ M.III,145; atippage too early J.III,48; atippago id. M.I,84; S.II,32; A.V,48. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】太早的，虽说不上的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】太早的，虽说不上的。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paggaha: {'def': '& Paggāha [fr. paggaṇhāti] 1. exertion, energy; (a) paggaha: D.III,213 (v. l. paggāha, also °nimitta); Ps.II,8 (°cariyā), 20 (°ṭṭha); DA.I,63 (viriy-indriyassa °lakkhaṇa); (b) paggāha: A.I,83, 256 (°nimitta); Dhs.277 (trsl. “grasp”), 336, 1359 (°nimitta); DhsA.406. ‹-› 2. (paggaha) favour, kindness, patronage [same meaning in Ep. Sk.] Vin.III,145=A.III,66; J.V,116 (opp. niggaha); VI,371 (id.). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'paggāha,【阳】paggahaṇa,【中】努力，精力，提起，举起，支援，赞助，策励，鞭策。cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati﹐努力鞭策心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'paggāha, 【阳】 Paggahana, 【中】努力，精力，提起，举起，支持，赞助。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paggahaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+gṛh, cp. paggaṇhāti] stretching forth, lifting, holding out; of the hands as sign of respectful salutation (cp. añjaliṁ paggaṇhāti) J.III,82. -- Abstr. °tā=paggaha 1. Vism.134. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paggahita: {'def': '(paggaṇhāti 的【过分】), 已举起，已伸展。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paggaṇhāti 的【过分】), 已举起，已伸展。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paggaṇhāti, cp. BSk. pragṛhīta lofty Divy 7, 102] holding up, or (being) held up Vin.II,131 (chatta° holding up a parasol,) 207 (id.); J.VI,235; SnA 175 (=Sn.p. 21). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paggalita: {'def': '[pp. of pa+gal] dripping PvA.56 (v. l. for T. vigalita). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paggava: {'def': '[etym?] a medicinal plant with bitter fruit J.II,105 (v. l. pakkava). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paggaṇhāti: {'def': '(pa + gah + ṇhā), 举起，拿起，支援，赞同，伸展。【过】 ~ṇhi。【现分】 paggaṇhanta。【独】 paggahetvā, paggayha。【潜】 paggahetabba。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+gah拿+ṇhā), 举起，拿起，坚持，支援，赞同，伸展，策励，鞭策。【过】paggaṇhi。【现分】paggaṇhanta。【独】paggaṇhetvā, paggayha。【义】paggaṇhetabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+gaṇhāti] 1. to stretch forth, hold out or up, take up D.I,123 (sujaṁ the sacrificial ladle), 125 (añjaliṁ stretch out the hollow hands as a token of respectful greeting); S.I,141; II,280; J.I,89 (paveṇiṁ); PvA.74 (turiyāni). ger. paggayha taking up, raising up, stretching forth Sn.350 (=uttāretvā SnA 349); Dh.268 (tulaṁ); Pv.II,9¹⁷ (bāhuṁ); IV,7⁴ (uccaṁ p.); VvA.7 (añjaliṁ). Often in phrase bāhā paggayha kandati to wail or lament with outstretched arms (a special pose of mourning) J.V,267; VI,188; PvA.92 (=pasāreti). -- 2. to take up, take care of, favour, support, befriend (opp. niggaṇhāti) J.I,511; II,21; V,116, 369; Miln.185, 186; PvA.114 (sappurisa-dhammaṁ). -- 3. to put to, exert, strain, apply vigorously (cittaṁ one’s mind) S.V,9; Ps.II,20 (paggaṇhanto viriyena carati). -- pp. paggahita (q. v.). -- Caus. paggaheti to exert Miln.390 (mānasaṁ). -- Caus. II. paggaṇhāpeti to cause to hold up or out, to cause to uphold or support Miln.21 (dhamma-dhajaṁ); J.V,248; PvA.74 (turiyāni). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paggharati: {'def': '[pa+gharati, which stands for kṣarati, also appearing as jharati, cp. Sk. nirjhara, Prk. pajjharati Mālatī-M. p. 51. BSk. pragharati Divy 57, 409; AvŚ I.282] to flow forth or out, to ooze, trickle, drip S.I,150; Sn.p. 125 (pubbañ ca lohitañ ca. p.); J.VI,328; Pv.I,6⁷ (gabbho pagghari=vissandi PvA.34); II,9¹¹ (=vissandati PvA.119); II,9²⁶ (akkhīni p.=vissandanti PvA.123, sic lege!); Miln.180; VvA.76 (navahi dvārehi puḷuvakā pagghariṁsu). -- pp. paggharita (q. v.). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+ghar+a), 流动，渗出，滴下，滴流。【过】pagghari。【过分】paggharita。【现分】paggharanta。【独】paggharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + ghar + a), 流动，渗出，滴下，滴流。【过】 ~ghari。【过分】 ~rita。【现分】 ~ranta。【独】 ~ritvā。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paggharaṇa: {'def': '【中】一滴一滴地流，渗出，滴。 ~ṇaka, 【形】流动的，渗出的，一滴一滴地流的。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】一滴一滴地流，渗出，滴。paggharaṇaka,【形】流动的，渗出的，一滴一滴地流的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. paggharati] trickling, oozing, dripping J.I,146; VI,187 (a°); f. °ī D.I,74 (=bindubinduṁ udakaṁ paggharati DA.I,218); the “mark” of liquid DhsA.332. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paggharaṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paggharati] flowing, trickling, oozing out J.VI,187 (app°-velā), 531; DhA.I,126 (lohitaṁ); Vism.262. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paggharita: {'def': '[pp. of paggharati] flowing, trickling S.II,179; Th.2, 466; PvA.198 (khīra). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paggāha: {'def': 'see paggaha. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paggāhika: {'def': '(adj.) [paggāha+ika] belonging to, receiving (or trading?) in cpd. °sālā a shop Vin.II,291 (cp. Vin. Texts III,383: “would he set up as a hawker in cloth, or would he open a shop”). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paghaṇa: {'def': '【阳】台阶(房子前后门门前的台阶)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. praghaṇa] a covered terrace before a house Vin.II,153 (“paghanaṁ nāma yaṁ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca pādehi hananti. tassa vihāra-dvāre ubhato kuṭṭaṁ niharitvā katapadesass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ” Bdhgh, quoted Vin. Texts III,175). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】台阶（房子前后门门前的台阶）。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pagiddha: {'def': '(adj.) [pa+giddha] greedy after, clinging to, finding delight in (Loc.) J.V,269 (=gadhita mucchita C. on p. 274). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pagijjhati 的【过分】), 已贪婪著，已执著於。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pagijjhati 的【过分】), 已贪婪着，已执着于。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pagumba: {'def': '【阳】矮树丛，繁茂处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】矮树丛，繁茂处。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+gumba] a thicket, bush, clump of trees Sn.233. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paguṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [pa+guṇa cp. Sk. praguṇa straight, der. “kind”] learned, full of knowledge, clever, wellacquainted, familiar D.III,170; Vv 53² (=nipuṇa VvA.232); J.II,243; IV,130; V,399; Vism.95 (Majjhimo me paguṇo: I am well versed in the M.), 242 (dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā); DA.I,95; SnA 195; KhA 73. -- paguṇaṁ karoti, to make oneself familiar with, to learn by heart, to master thoroughly J.II,166; III,537 (tayo vede); Miln.12 (Abhidhamma-piṭakaṁ).

--bhāva familiarity with, acquaintance, efficient state, cleverness in, experience. knowledge (cp. pāguñña) J.III,537; Dhs.48, 49. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+guṇa cp. Sk. praguṇa straight, der. “kind”),【形】熟练的，练达的，熟知的，熟悉的(learned, full of knowledge, clever, wellacquainted, familiar.)。paguṇabhāva, 熟练的状态(familiarity with, acquaintance, efficient state, cleverness in, experience. knowledge)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】熟练的，熟知的，熟悉的，牢记的。 ~tā, 【阴】胜任。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paguṇatā: {'def': '【阴】Paguṇatta,【中】胜任( fitness, competence)。DhsA.(CS:DhsA.pg.195)：Paguṇatāti paguṇabhāvo, anāturatā niggilānatāti attho.(练达性：练达，无疾苦性，无病性之义。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) & Paguṇatta (nt.) (doubtful) abstr. to paguṇa in explⁿ of pāguññatā at Dhs.48 & 49 (trsl. fitness, competence). (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pagāhati: {'def': '(pa + gāh + a), 跳入水，下沉，投入。【过】 pagāhi。【现分】pagāhanta。【独】 pagāhitvā。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+gāhati] to dive into, sink into Sn.819 (≈ ajjhogāha SnA 537; =ogāhati ajjhogāhati pavisati Nd¹ 152). -- pp. pagāḷha. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+gāh冲进+a), 跳入水，下沉，投入。【过】pagāhi。【现分】pagāhanta。【独】pagāhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pagāḷha: {'def': '(Pagāhati的【过分】) 跳入水，下沉，投入。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pagāhati] suṅk into, immersed in (Loc.) Sn.441, 772 (=ogāḷha ajjhogāḷha nimugga Nd¹ 26). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paha: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [?] flight of steps from which to step down into the water, a ghat (=tittha Bdhgh) D.I,223. The meaning is uncertain, it is trsl^d as “accessible” at Dial. I.283 (q. v. for further detail). Neumann (Majjhima trslⁿ I.513) trsl^s “ganz und gar erloschen” (pabhā?). It is not at all improbable to take pahaṁ as ppr. of pajahati (as contracted fr. pajahaṁ like pahatvāna for pajahitvāna at Sn.639), thus meaning “giving up entirely.” The same form in the latter meaning occurs at ThA.69 (Ap. v.3). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.)=pahu, i. e. able to (with inf.) J.V,198 (C. pahū samattho). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paharati: {'def': '(pa+har拿+a), 打，打击，袭击，传递。【过】pahari。【现分】paharanta。【独】paharitvā,【不】paharituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + har + a), 打，打击，袭击。【过】 pahari。【现分】 ~ranta。【独】 ~ritvā, 【不】 ~rituŋ。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+hṛ] to strike, hit, beat J.III,26, 347; VI,376; VvA.65; PvA.4; freq. in phrase accharaṁ p. to snap one’s finger, e. g. J.II,447; see accharā¹. aor. pahāsi (cp. pariyudāhāsi) Vv 29² (=pahari VvA.123). -- pp. pahaṭa (q. v.). Caus. paharāpeti. -- 1. to cause to be assailed J.IV,150. -- 2. to put on or join on to J.VI,32 (°hārāpesi). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paharaṇa: {'def': '【中】打，攻击，袭击武器。paharaṇaka,【形】碰撞的，打击的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】打，袭击武器。 ~ka, 【形】碰撞的，打击的。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paharati] striking, beating SnA 224; PvA.285. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paharaṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paharaṇa] striking, hitting J.I,418. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahasati: {'def': '[pa+has] to laugh, giggle J.V,452 (ūhasati+). See also pahassati & pahāsati. -- pp. pahasita (q. v.). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahasita: {'def': '[pp. of pahasati or °hassati] laughing, smiling, joyful, pleased Miln.297; J.I,411 (nicca° mukha); II,179. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahassati: {'def': '[pa+has, perhaps pa+hṛṣ, Sk. harṣati, cp. pahaṁsati²] to laugh, be joyful or cheerful Sn.887 (=haṭṭha pahaṭṭha Nd¹ 296; cp. SnA 555 hāsajāta). The pp. pahasita (q. v.) is derived fr. pres. pahasati, which makes the equation pahassati=pahaṁsati² all the more likely. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahata: {'def': '[pp. of pa+han] killed, overcome M.III,46; S.II,54; J.VI,512. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahaṁsati: {'def': '² [pa+haṁsati²=hassati, of hṛṣ to be glad, cp. ghaṁsati²] to be pleased, to rejoice; only in pp. pahaṭṭha² & pahaṁsita² (q. v.), and in Pass. pahaṁsīyati to be gladdened, to exult Miln.326 (+kuhīyati). See also sam°. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pa+haṁsati¹=ghaṁsati¹, of ghṛṣ to rub, grind] to strike, beat (a metal), rub, sharpen (a cutting instrument, as knife, hatchet, razor etc.) J.I,278; II,102 (pharasuṁ); DhA.I,253 (khuraṁ pahaṁsi sharpened the razor; corresponds to ghaṭṭeti in preceding context). -- pp. pahaṭṭha¹ & pahaṁsita¹ (q. v.). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahaṁsita: {'def': '¹ [pp. of pahaṁsati] struck, beaten (of metal), refined J.VI,218 (ukkā-mukha°), 574 (id.). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of pahaṁsati²] gladdened, delighted, happy DhA.I,230 (°mukha); VvA.279 (°mukha SS pahasita at Miln.297 is better to be taken as pp. of pahasati, because of combⁿ haṭṭha pahaṭṭha hasita pahasita. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahaṭa: {'def': '(paharati 的【过分】)。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Pahata, (paharati 的【过分】) 已打击，已袭击。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paharati] assailed, struck, beaten (of musical instruments) J.II,102, 182; VI,189; VvA.161 (so for pahata); PvA.253. Of a ball: driven, impelled Vism.143 (°citra-geṇḍuka)=DhsA.116 (so read for pahaṭṭha-citta-bheṇḍuka and correct Expositor 153 accordingly). The reading pahaṭa at PvA.4 is to be corrected to paṭaha. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahaṭṭha: {'def': '(pahaṁsati 的【过分】), 已高兴，已非常快活。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of pahaṁsati¹] struck, beaten (of metal) J.VI,217 (suvaṇṇa). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of pahaṁsati²] gladdened, happy, cheerful, delighted Vin.III,14; J.I,278 (twice; once as °mānasa, which is wrongly taken by C. as pahaṭṭha¹), 443; II,240 (tuṭṭha°); Vism.346 (haṭṭha°); DhA.I,230 (tuṭṭha°); VvA.337. In its original sense of “bristling” (with excitement or joy), with ref. to ear & hair of an elephant in phrase pahaṭṭha-kaṇṇa-vāla at Vin.II,195= J.V,335 (cp. Sk. prahṛṣṭa-roman, N. of an Asura at Kathāsaritsāgara 47, 30). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pahaŋsati 的【过分】), 已高兴，已非常快活。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pahena: {'def': '(=paheṇa?),【中】派遣(=pahiṇa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [paheṇa?] same as pahiṇa in °gamana going on errands J.II,82. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paheṇaka: {'def': '【中】适宜送给他人的礼物。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. BSk. praheṇaka in sense of “sweetmeat” (糖果、蜜饯),【中】适宜送给他人的礼物(a present)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. BSk. praheṇaka in sense of “sweetmeat” at Divy 13, 258; the *Sk. form is prahelaka] a present J.VI,369 (so here, whereas the same word as pahiṇaka at A.III,76 clearly means “sweetmeat”). (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahita: {'def': '² [pp. of pahiṇati] sent J.I,86 (sāsana); DhA.II,242; III,191 (interchanging with pesita). (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'I.(padahati‹dhā的【过分】) 努力，热心。pahitatta﹐自励，精进，不惜身命。SA.6.3./I,204.：Pahitattoti pesitatto(自己已豁出去，称为自励)。MA.57./CS:p.3.75：Pahitattoti kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pesitatto.(?对身体及生命没有期待的自我精进，称为自励。) II.(pahiṇāti‹hi的【过分】) 送。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pahiṇa: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. pa+hi] sending; being sent; a messenger, in °gamaṇa going as messenger, doing messages D.I,5; M.I,345; J.II,82; Miln.370; DA.I,78. See also pahana. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahiṇagamana: {'def': '【中】去当使者。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】去当使者(going on errands)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pahiṇaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pahiṇati?] a sweetmeat A.III,76 (v. l. pahenaka). See also paheṇaka. The (late) Sk. form is prahelaka. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahiṇana: {'def': '【中】发送，派遣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pahiṇati] sending, dispatch DhA.II,243. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】发送，派遣。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pahiṇati: {'def': '[pa+hi, Sk. hinoti] to send; Pres. pahiṇati. Vin.III,140 sq.; IV,18; DhA.II,243; aor. pahiṇi J I,60 (sāsanaṁ); V,458 (paṇṇāni); VvA.67; DhA.I,72; II,56, 243; ger. pahiṇitva VvA.65. -- pp. pahita² (q. v.). There is another aor.pāhesi (Sk. prāhaiṣīt) in analogy to which a new pres. pāheti has been formed, so that pāhesi is now felt to be a der. fr. pāheti & accordingly is grouped with the latter. All other forms with he° (pahetuṁ e. g.) are to be found under pāheti. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahiṇāti: {'def': '(pa+hi +ṇā), 送。【过】pahiṇi。【现分】pahiṇanta。【独】pahiṇitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + hi + ṇā), 送。【过】 pahiṇi。【现分】 ~ṇanta。【独】 pahiṇitvā。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pahona: {'def': 'in Pahonakāla at J.III,17 read as pahonaka°. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahonaka: {'def': '【形】充份的，充足的。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pahoti] sufficient, enough J.I,346; II,122; III,17 (so read for pahona°); IV,277; Vism.404; DhA.I,78, 219; VvA.264; PvA.81. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】充份的，充足的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pahoti: {'def': '& (in verse) pabhavati [pa+bhu, cp. Vedic prabhavati in meaning “to be helpful”] 1. to proceed from (with Gen.), rise, originate D.II,217; M.III,76; S.II,184; as pabhavati at Sn.728=1050 (cp. Nd² 401); (perf. med.) pahottha it has arisen from (Gen.), i. e. it was the fault of J.V,102. -- 2. to be sufficient, adequate or able (with inf.) D.I,240; M.I,94; S.I,102; Sn.36, 867; J.V,305; DA.I,192; III,254 (fut. pahossati); VvA.75; Dāvs.IV,18. Neg. both with na° & a° viz. nappahoti J.VI,204; DhA.III,408; nappahosi J.I,84; appahoti DhA.IV,177; appabhonto PvA.73; in verse appabhavaṁ J.III,373 (=appahonto C.). -- pp. pahūta (q. v.). (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+hū+a), 能够，胜任，充份。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + hū + a), 能够，胜任，充份。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pahtta: {'def': '¹ [pp. of padahati] resolute, intent, energetic; only in cpd. pahitatta of resolute will (cp. BSk. prahitātman Divy 37) M.I,114; S.I,53 (expl^d by Bdhgh with wrong derivation fr. peseti as “pesit-atta” thus identifying pahita¹ & pahita², see K.S. 320); II,21, 239; III,73 sq.; IV,60, 145, V,187, A.II,14, III,21, IV.302 sq.; V,84; Sn.425, 432 sq., 961; It.71; Nd¹ 477; Th.2, 161 (expl^d at ThA.143, with the same mistake as above, as pesita citta); Nd¹ 477 (id.; pesit-atta); Miln.358, 366, 406. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahāna: {'def': '【中】切除，放弃，避免。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. pa彻底+hā放弃, see pajahati),【中】放弃，离去，舍断，拒绝(giving up, leaving, abandoning, rejection)。【单.与】【单.属】pahānāya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+hā, see pajahati] giving up, leaving, abandoning, rejection M.I,60, III,4, 72; S.I,13, 132 (dukkha°); II,170; III,53; IV,7 sq.; D.III,225, 246; A.I,82, 134; II,26, 232 (kaṇhassa kammassa °āya).; III,431; Sn.374, 1106 (=vūpasama paṭinissagga etc. Nd² 429); Dh.331; J.I,79; Ps.I,26; II,98, 156; Pug.16; Dhs.165, 174, 339; Nett 15 sq., 24, 192; Vism.194 (nīvaraṇa-santāpa°); DhsA.166, 345; VvA.73. --°pariññā see pariññā; --°vinaya avoidance consisting in giving up (coupled with saṁvara-vinaya avoidance by protection, prophylaxis), based on the 5 qualities tadaṅga-pahāna, vikkhambhana°, samuccheda°, paṭippassaddhi°, nissaraṇa° DhsA.351; SnA 8. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahāra: {'def': '【阳】殴打，打击。 ~dāna, 【中】给打击，攻击。 Ekappahārena = 突然。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+hṛ, Class. Sk. prahāra, see paharati] 1. a blow, stroke, hit D.I,144 (daṇḍa°); M.I,123, 126; Pv IV.16⁷ (sālittaka°); M.I,123; DhA.III,48 (°dāna-sikkhāpada the precepts concerning those guilty of giving blows, cp. Vin.IV,146); PvA.4 (ekappahārena with one stroke). 56 (muggara°), 66 (id.) 253. -- ekappahārena at Vism.418 as adv. “all at once.” pahāraṁ deti to give a blow Vin.IV,146; S.IV,62; A.III,121; Vism.314 (pahārasatāni); PvA.191 (sīse). -- 2. a wound J.IV,89; V,459 (°mukha). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】殴打，打击。pahāradāna,【中】给打击，攻击。ekappahārena = 突然。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pahāraṇa: {'def': 'see abhi°. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahārin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paharati] striking, assaulting J.II,211. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahāsa: {'def': '【阳】非常欢乐，欢笑。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+has, cp. Class. Sk. prahāsa] laughing, mirth Dhs.9, 86, 285; VvA.132; Sdhp.223. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pa+has笑, cp. Class. Sk. prahāsa),【阳】非常欢乐，欢笑(laughing, mirth)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pahāsati: {'def': '令人笑。in pahāsanto saparisaṁ at ThA.69 should preferably be read as pahāsayanto parisaṁ, thus taken as Caus. of pa+has, i. e. making one smile, gladdening.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'in pahāsanto saparisaṁ at ThA.69 should preferably be read as pahāsayanto parisaṁ, thus taken as Caus. of pa+has, i. e. making one smile, gladdening. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahāseti: {'def': '[Caus. of pahasati] to make laugh, to gladden, to make joyful Vism.289 (cittaṁ pamodeti hāseti pahāseti). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + has + e), 令人笑，使喜悦。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 pahāsita。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+has笑+e；Caus. of pahasati), 令人笑，使喜悦(to make laugh, to gladden, to make joyfu)。【过】pahāsesi。【过分】pahāsita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pahāsi: {'def': 'is 3^rd sg. aor. of paharati; found at Vv 29⁸ (musalena=pahari VvA.113); and also 3rd sg. aor of pajahati, e. g. at Sn.1057 (=pajahi Nd² under jahati) (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahāya: {'def': '(pajahati 的【独】), 遗弃了，放弃了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pajahati 的【独】), 遗弃了，放弃了。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'is ger. of pajahati (q. v.). (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahāyin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pa+hā, see pajahati] giving up, abandoning Sn.1113, 1132, cp. Nd² 431; Sdhp.500. (Page 448)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahāyī: {'def': '【阳】放弃的人。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】放弃的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pahīna: {'def': '(pajahati 的【过分】), 已排除，已抛弃，已消灭( given up, abandoned, left, eliminated)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pajahati 的【过分】), 已排除，已抛弃，已消灭。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of pajahati] given up, abandoned, left, eliminated Vin.III,97=IV.27; S.II,24; III,33; IV,305; Sn.351 (°jāti-maraṇa), 370, 564, 1132 (°mala-moha); It.32; Nd² s. v.; Ps.I,63; II,244; Pug.12, 22. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahīyati: {'def': '(pa + ha + ī + ya), 消失，过世，被遗弃。【过】 pahīyi。【过分】pahīna。【现分】 ~yamāna。【独】 ~yitvā。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Pahiyyati(pa+hā放弃+ī+ya)(pass. of pajahati),被舍弃，消失，过世(to be abandoned, to pass away, vanish)。【过】pahīyi。【过分】pahīna。【现分】pahīyamāna。【独】pahīyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Pass. of pajahati] to be abandoned, to pass away, vanish M.I,7; S.I,219 (fut. °issati); II,196 (ppr. °īyamāna); V,152; Sn.806; Nd¹ 124; VbhA.271. Spelt pahiyyati at S.V,150. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahū: {'def': '(cp. Vedic prabhū, fr. pa+bhū),【形】能干的，能够的，能…的(able)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic prabhū, fr. pa+bhū] able Sn.98; J.V,198; Nd² 615°. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】能干的，能够的，能…的。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pahūta: {'def': '(pp. of pa+bhū, cp. Vedic prabhūta),【形】丰富的，很多的，宽广的(sufficient, abundant, much, considerable)。pahūtajivha,【形】有宽舌的。pahūtabhakkha,【形】可吃很多的，吃很多的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】丰富的，很多的，宽广的。 ~jivha, 【形】有宽舌的。 ~bhakkha,【形】可吃很多的，吃很多的。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of pa+bhū, cp. Vedic prabhūta] sufficient, abundant, much, considerable Sn.428, 862 sq.; Pv.I,5² (=anappaka, bahu, yāvadattha C.; Dhp at PvA.25 gives bahuka as inferior variant); I,11⁷ (=apariyanta, uḷāra; v. l. bahū); II,7⁵ (v. l. bahūta); PvA.145 (dhana; v. l. bahuta); SnA 294 (id.), 321 (id.). See also bahūta.

--jivha large tongued D.II,18; III,144, 173. --jivhatā the characteristic of a large tongue Sn.p. 107. --dhañña having many riches J.IV,309. --dhana id. Th.2, 406 (C. reading for T. bahuta-ratana). --pañña rich in wisdom Sn.359, 539, 996. --bhakkha eating much, said of the fire S.I,69. --vitta=°dhañña D.I,134; Sn.102; PvA.3. (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pahūtika: {'def': '(adj.)=pahuta PvA.135 (v. l. BB bahuta; in explⁿ of bahu). (Page 449)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajagghati: {'def': '(pa + jaggh + a), 高声地笑。【过】 ~ghi。【动名】 ~ghana。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+jaggh笑+a), 高声地笑(to laugh out loud)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+jagghati] to laugh out loud J.VI,475. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajaha: {'def': '(adj.) [pa+jaha, pres. base of jahati] only neg. a° not giving anything up, greedy A.III,76. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajahati: {'def': '(pa + ha + a, ha 重叠，而前 h 被改成 j), 放弃，退隐，放弃，遗弃。【过】 pajahi。【过分】 ~hita。【独】 ~hitvā, pahāya。【现分】 pajahanta。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pajahāti) (pa+hā放弃+a, ha 重叠，而前 h 被改成 j), 放弃(give up)，退隐(renounce)，遗弃(abandon, let go, get rid of)。【过】pajahi, pahāsi。【过分】pajahita, pahīna。【独】pajahitvā, pahāya, passim(=hitvā), pahatvāna, pajahitvā。【现分】pajahaṁ, pajahanta。【未】pahāssaṁ﹐pajahissati。【义】pahātabba﹐pajahitabba。【被】pahīyati。《中部》《一切漏经》说，当七种舍离方法：1.有漏由(正)见而能舍离(āsavā dassanā pahātabbā)。2.有漏由守护(六根)而能舍离(atthi āsavā saṁvarā pahātabbā)。3.有由受用(食衣住药)而能舍离(atthi āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbā)。4.有由忍耐(寒暑饥渴等)而能舍离(atthi āsavā adhivāsanā pahātabbā)。5.有由回避(危险)而能舍离(atthi āsavā parivajjanā pahātabbā)。6.有由遣除(欲念、瞋念、害念等)而舍离(atthi āsavā vinodanā pahātabbā)。7.有由修习(七觉支)而能舍离(atthi āsavā bhāvanā pahātabbā)。(M.2./I,7.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(°jahāti) [pa+jahati of hā] to give up, renounce, forsake, abandon, eliminate, let go, get rid of; freq. as synonym of jahati (see Nd² under jahati with all forms). Its wide range of application with reference to all evils of Buddhist ethics is seen from exhaustive Index at S VI,57 (Index vol.). -- Pres. pajahati S.I,187; III,33=Nd² 680, Q 3 (yaṁ na tumhākaṁ taṁ pajahatha); It.32 (kiṁ appahīnaṁ kiṁ pajahāma); 117; A.IV,109 sq. (akusalaṁ, sāvajjaṁ); Sn.789 (dukkhaṁ), 1056, 1058; Ps.I,63; II,244. ppr. pajahaṁ S.III,27; fut. pahāssaṁ (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 151¹) M.II,100. -- aor. pajahi & pahāsi Vin.I,36; S.I,12=23 (saṅkhaṁ); Sn.1057. -- ger. pahāya S.I,12 (kāme), 23 (vicikicchaṁ), 188 (nīvaraṇāni), Sn.17, 209, 520 & passim; Nd² 430; PvA.16, 122 (=hitvā), 211; pahatvāna Sn.639, and pajahitvā. fut. pajahissati S.II,226. -- grd. pahātabba M.I,7; Sn.558; VvA.73, & pajahitabba -- pp. pahīna (q. v.). -- Pass. pahīyati (q. v.). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajappati: {'def': '(pa + japp + a), 天真地说，恳求。【过】 ~ppi。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+jappeti] to yearn for, crave, to be greedy after S.I,5=J.VI,25 (anāgataṁ=pattheti C.). (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+japp+a), 天真地说，恳求。【过】pajappi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pajappita: {'def': '[pp. of pajappeti] desired, longed for S.I,181; J.VI,359. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajappā: {'def': '(pa先﹑前+jappā )﹐贪得无厌(repeatedly greed for)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [pa+jappā] desire, greed for, longing J.VI,25 (anāgata°); Sn.592; Dhs.1059, 1136. (Page 386)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajja: {'def': '¹ [cp. Sk. padya] a path, road Sn.514; DA.I,262. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [cp. Sk. padya & pādya belonging to the feet, Lat. acupedius swift-footed; Gr. pezόs foot-soldier, see also pattika¹] foot-oil, foot-salve Vin.I,205; D.II,240; J.III,120; IV,396; V,376 (=pādabbhañjana C.). (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.诗，韵文。2.。pajjabanda,【阳】诗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 诗，韵文。 2. 对脚有益的。【阳】道路，路径。 ~banda, 【阳】诗。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2 (cp. Sk. padya & pādya belonging to the feet), 对脚有益的(foot-oil, foot-salve(=pādabbhañjana))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (cp. Sk. padya) 【阳】道路，路径(a path, road Sn.514; DA.I,262.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pajjalana: {'def': '【中】燃发。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】燃发。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pajjalati: {'def': '(pa+jal(jval)+a), 燃烧起来，燃烧(to burn (forth), blaze up, go into flame)。【过】pajjali。【过分】pajjalita。【现分】pajjalanta。【独】pajjalitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + jal + a), 燃烧起来，燃烧。【过】 ~jali。【过分】 ~lita。【现分】 ~lanta。【独】 ~litvā。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+jalati of jval] to burn (forth), blaze up, go into flame Vin.I,180; Sn.687 (sikhi pajjalanto); J.I,215; ThA.62; PvA.38. -- pp. pajjalita (q. v.). (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajjalita: {'def': '[pp. of pajjalati] in flames, burning, blazing S.I,133; Sn.p. 21 (aggi); Dh.146; PvA.43 (sāṭakā). (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajjati: {'def': '[pad, Vedic padyate only in meaning “to come to fall,” later Sk. also “to go to”] to go, go to; usually not in simplex, but only in compⁿ with prefixes; as āpajjati, uppajjati, nipajjati etc. -- Alone only in one doubtful passage, viz. A.IV,362 (vv. ll. paccati, pabbati, gacchati.). -- pp. panna (q. v.). (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pad, Vedic padyate only in meaning “to come to fall,” later Sk. also “to go to”), 去(to go, go to; usually not in simplex, but only in compn with prefixes; as āpajjati, uppajjati, nipajjati etc. (vv. ll. paccati, pabbati, gacchati.))。pp. panna (q.v.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pajjhāyati: {'def': '[pa+jhāyati²] to be in flames, to waste, decay, dry up; fig. to be consumed or overcome with grief, disappointment or remorse Vin.III,19; IV,5; A.II,214, 216; III,57; J.III,534 (pajjhāti metri causa; C=anusocati)=Miln.5. -- ppr. pajjhāyanto downcast, in formula tuṇhībhūto maṅkubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho p. M.I,132, 258 and passim. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+jhā+ya), 悲痛不堪，懊悔不堪，深思。【过】pajjhāyi。【现分】pajjhāyanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + jhā + ya), 悲痛不堪，懊悔不堪，深思。【过】 ~āyi。【现分】 ~yanta。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pajjota: {'def': '【阳】灯，光，光彩。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】灯，光，光彩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Ved. pradyota, pra+dyut] light, lustre, splendour, a lamp S.I,15, 47; A.II,140; Sn.349; Pug.25; Sdhp.590. -- telapajjota an oil lamp Vin.I,16=D.I,85= A.I,56 ≈; Sn.p. 15. -- dhammapajjota the lamp of the Dhamma Miln.21. paññā-pajjota the torch of knowledge Dhs.16, 20, 292, 555; VbhA.115. pajjotassa nibbānaṁ the extinguishing of the lamp D.II,157; S.I,159; A.IV,3. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajjunna: {'def': '【阳】雨云，雨神。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Ved. parjanya, for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under quercus & spargo] rain-cloud J.I,332 (p. vuccati megho); IV,253. Otherwise only as Np. of the Rain God D.II,260; S.I,29; J.I,331. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】雨云，雨神。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pajā: {'def': '(f.) [Ved. prajā, pra+jan] progeny, offspring, generation, beings, men, world (of men), mankind (cp. use of Bibl. Gr. gέnnhma in same meaning) D.II,55; S.V,346, 362 sq.; A.II,75 sq.; IV,290; V,232 sq., 253 sq.; Sn.298, 545, 654, 684, 776, 936, 1104 (=sattā Nd² 377); Dh.28, 85, 254, 343 (=sattā DhA.IV,49); Nd¹ 47, 292; Pv.II,11⁷; IV,3³⁴; Pug.57; Vism.223 (=pajāyana-vasena sattā); DhA.I,174; PvA.150, 161. -- Very freq. in formula sassamana-brāhmaṇī pajā “this world with its samaṇas and brāhmans” D.I,250; S.I,160, 168, 207; II,170; III,28, 59; IV,158; V,204, 352; A.II,130; V,204; Sn.p. 15; It.121 etc. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】后裔，子孙，世代，人类。Pajāpati,【阳】波闍波提(佛教第一个比丘尼，世尊的姨母)，造物主。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】后裔，子孙，世代，人类。 ~pati, 【阳】波阇波提，造物主。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pajānanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pajānāti] knowledge, understanding, discernment; used in exegetical literature as syn. of paññā Nd² 380=Dhs.16, 20, 555; Pug.25; Nett 28, 54. As nt. °a at Vism.436. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】知识，理解，辨别。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】知识，理解，辨别。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pajānāti: {'def': '(pa+ñā +nā), 慧、知、详悉。pajānāti与vijānāti(了别、了知)同义。(M.43./293.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+jānāti] to know, find out, come to know, understand, distinguish D.I,45 (yathābhūtaṁ really, truly), 79 (ceto paricca), 162, 249; Sn.626, 726 sq., 987; It.12 (ceto paricca); Dh.402; Pv.I,11¹² (=jānāti PvA.60); J.V,445; Pug.64. -- ppr. pajānaṁ Sn.884, 1050, 1104 (see explⁿ at Nd¹ 292=Nd² 378); It.98; Pv IV.1⁶⁴; and pajānanto Sn.1051. -- ger. paññāya (q. v.) -- Caus. paññāpeti; pp. paññatta; Pass. paññāyati & pp. paññāta (q. v.). Cp. sampajāna. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + ñā + nā), 详悉。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pajāpati: {'def': '(°ī) 1. (adj.) together with his wife Vin.I,23, 342; IV,62; J.I,345; PvA.20. (m.) [Ved. prajāpati, prajā+pati Lord of all created beings, Lord of Creation] Prajāpati (Np.), the supreme Lord of men, only mentioned in one formula together with Inda & Brahmā, viz. devā saindakā sabrahmakā sapajāpatikā in sense of foll. Also at VbhA.497 with Brahmā. -- 2. prajāpati (f.) [of Ved. prajāvant, adj.-n. fr. prajā “having (or rich in) progeny,” with p for v, as pointed out by Trenckner Notes 62¹⁶] “one who has offspring,” a chief wife of a man of the higher class (like a king, in which case=“chief queen”) or a gahapati, in which case simply “wife”; cp. BSk. prajāpatī “lady” Divy 2, 98. -- Vin.I,23; III,25; IV,18, 258; S.II,243; A.I,137 (catasso °iyo); IV,210, 214; Vv 41⁶ (=one of the 16,000 chief queens of Sakka VvA.183); DhA.I,73; PvA.21, 31. sapajāpatika (adj.) together with his wife Vin.I,23, 342; IV,62; J.I,345; PvA.20. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pajāpatī: {'def': 'f. = Mahāpajāpatī Gotamī 波闍波提[佛的叔母, 繼母, 最初的尼僧].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'f. =Mahāpajāpatī Gotamī 波闍波提[仏の叔母, 継母, 尼].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Pajāpatī-Gotamī: {'def': '（比库尼名）巴迦巴帝苟答弥，（古音译：）波闍波提瞿昙弥', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Pajāyana: {'def': '【中】出生，存在。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+jan] being born Vism.223. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】出生，存在。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pajāyati: {'def': '(pa+jan+ya), 出生，生产。【过】pajāyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + jan + ya), 出生，生产。【过】 pajāyi。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+jāyati] to be born or produced J.V,386; VI,14. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakampana: {'def': 'see pakappanā. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakampati: {'def': '(pa + kamp + a), 战栗，震动。【过】 ~mpi。【过分】 ~mpita。【动名】 ~mpana。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+kamp+a, BSk. prakampati), 战栗，震动(to shake, quake, tremble)。caus. pakampeti。【过】pakampi。【过分】pakampita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+kampati. Cp. BSk. prakampati Jtm 220; Mvyutp. 151=kampati.] to shake, quake, tremble J.I,47 (v. 269); PvA.199. -- Caus. pakampeti S.I,107. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakampita: {'def': '[pp. of pa+kamp] shaken, trembling S.I,133= Th.2, 200. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakappanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pakappeti] fixing one’s attention on, planning, designing, scheme, arrangement Sn.945 (cp. Nd¹ 72 186, where two pakappanā’s, viz. taṇhā° & diṭṭhi°; at Nd¹ 429 it is synonymous with taṇhā; Bdhgh has reading pakampana for °kapp° and expl^d by kampa-karaṇa SnA 568). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】评理，计划，安排。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】评理，计划，安排。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakappeti: {'def': '(pa + kapp + e), 考虑，设计，安排。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+kapp+e), 考虑，设计，安排。【过】pakappesi。【过分】pakappita。【独】pakappetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakappeṭi: {'def': '[pra+Caus. of kḷp, cp. Ved. prakalpayitar] to arrange, fix, settle, prepare, determine, plan S.II,65 (ceteti p. anuseti); Sn.886 (pakappayitvā=takkayitvā vitakkayitvā saṁkappayitvā Nd¹ 295). -- pp. pakappita (q. v.). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakappita: {'def': '[pp. of pakappeti] arranged, planned, attended to, designed, made Sn.648 (=kata SnA 471). 784, 786 (diṭṭhi “prejudiced view” Fausböll; cp. Nd¹ 72 and pakappanā), 802, 838 (=kappita abhisaṅkhata saṇṭhapita Nd¹ 186), 902, 910. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakaraṇa: {'def': '【中】场合，文学的作品，文学的说明。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】场合，文学的作品，文学的说明。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+kṛ] 1. performance, undertaking paragraph (of the law) D.I,98 (“offence”? see Dial. I.120); S.III,91; Miln.189. -- 2. occasion Vin.I,44; II,75; III,20. -- 3. exposition, arrangement, literary work, composition, book; usually in titles only, viz. Abhidhamma° J.I,312; Dpvs.V,37; Kathāvatthu° Paṭṭhāna° Miln.12; Netti° one of the Canonical books (see netti). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakaroti: {'def': '[pa+kṛ, Ved. prakaroti] to effect, perform, prepare, make, do S.I,24 (pakubbati); Sn.254 (id.), 781, 790 (ppr. med. pakubbamāna; cp. Nd¹ 65); It.21 (puññaṁ); SnA 169 (pakurute, corresponding with sevati). -- pp. pakata (q. v.). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakata: {'def': '[pp. of pa+kṛ] done, made; as --° by nature (cp. pakati) Sn.286; J.IV,38; Pv.I,6⁸; II,3¹⁶; III,10⁵ (pāpaṁ= samācaritaṁ PvA.214); Miln.218; DhA.II,11 (pāpaṁ); PvA.31, 35, 103 (ṭ), 124. -- icchāpakata covetous by nature A.III,119, 219 sq.; Pug.69; Vism.24 (here however taken by Bdhgh as “icchāya apakata” or “upadduta”); issāpakata envious by nature S.II,260; PvA.46, cp. macchariyā pakata afflicted with selfishness PvA.124. On pakata at It.89 see apakata. --pakatatta (pakata+ attan) natural, of a natural self, of good behaviour, incorrupt, “integer” Vin.II,6, 33, 204; J.I,236 (bhikkhu, +sīlavā, etc.). At Vin.II,32 the pakatatta bhikkhu as the regular, ordained monk is contrasted with the pārivāsika bh. or probationer. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】做，制造。pakatatta,【形】好行为的，健全情况的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】做，制造。 ~atta, 【形】好行为的，健全情况的。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakati: {'def': '【阴】最初的形式，天然的形式，自然。 ~gamana, 【中】平常的散步。 ~citta, 【中】常态意识。【形】健全的心。 ~sīla, 【中】天然的德行。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】最初的形式，本性的形态，自然。pakatigamana,【中】平常的散步。pakaticitta,【中】本性心(指有分心)。【形】本性心的。pakatisīla,【中】本性的德行。Kv.p.615.︰Hañci Arahā pakaticitte ṭhito parinibbāyati, no ca vata re vattabbe-- “Arahā āneñje ṭhito parinibbāyatī”ti.(假如阿罗汉住立於本性心而入灭，你不应该说--阿罗汉住立於不动而入灭。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Ved. prakṛti] 1. original or natural form, natural state or condition (lit. make-up); as °-: primary, original, real Vin. I.189; II,113; J.I,146 (°vesena in her usual dress); KhA 173 (°kammakara, °jeṭṭhaputta); VvA.12 (°pabhassara), 109 (°bhaddatā). -- Instr. pakatiyā by nature, ordinarily, as usual Ps.II,208; VvA.78; PvA.215, 263. -- 2. occasion, happening, opportunity, (common) occurrence D.I,168 (trsl. “common saying”); Pv.II,8⁹ (=°pavutti PvA.110). -- Der. pakatika & pākatika.

--upanissaya sufficing condition in nature: see Cpd. 194 n. 3. -- gamana natural or usual walk DhA I 389. --citta ordinary or normal consciousness Kvu 615 (cp. Kvu trsl. 359 n. 5, and BSk. prakṛti-nirvāṇatva Bodhicary. at Poussin 256). --yānaka ordinary vehicle DhA.I,391. --sīla natural or proper virtue DA.I,290. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakatika: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 有…性质的，天生的。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 有…性质的，天生的，天然的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pakati] being by nature, of a certain nature J.II,30; Miln.220; DA.I,198; PvA.242 (=rūpa); DhsA.404. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakattheti: {'def': '[pa+kattheti] talk out against, denounce J.V,7 (mā °katthāsi; C. akkosi garahi nindi; gloss paccakkhāsi). Should it be ‘pakaḍḍhāsi? (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakaṭṭha: {'def': '【形】最贵族的。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】最贵族的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakaṭṭhaka: {'def': '[pa+kaṭṭha+ka; kaṭṭha pp. of kṛṣ, cp. Sk. prakarṣaka of same root in same meaning, but cp. also kaṭṭha²] (adj.) troublesome, annoying; (m.) a troubler, worrier S.I,174 (v. l. pagaṇḍaka; C. rasagiddha; trsl. “pertinacious”). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakaṭṭhita: {'def': 'see pakk°. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakhuma: {'def': '【中】睫毛。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】睫毛(eyelash)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Ved. pakṣman, diaeretic form for the contracted form pamha, the latter prepondering in poetry, while pakhuma is mostly found in prose. Similar doublets are sukhuma & saṇha; as regards etym. cp. Av. pasnem eyelid, Gr. pέktw to comb, pόkos fleece, Lat. pecto to comb, pecten comb, Ohg. fahs hair] an eyelash, unsally as adj.: having eyelashes (-°) D.II,18 (go°); S.I,132 (°antarikāyaṁ between the lashes); J.V,216 (visāla° for alārapamha T.); ThA.255 (dīgha° for āyatapamha Th.2, 383); VvA.162, 279. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakiledeti: {'def': '[Caus of pa+kliś, cp. kelideti] to make wet, moisten (with hot water) J.VI,109 (=temetvā khipati C.). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakirati: {'def': '(pa+kir散+a), 散布，让倒下，丢下。【过】pakiri。【过分】pakiṇṇa。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + kir + a), 散布，让倒下，丢下。【过】 pakiri。【过分】 pakiṇṇa。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+kirati] 1. to let down (the hair), scatter, let fall D.II,139=148 (ger. pakiriya); J.V,203 (so read for parikati); VI,207 (aor °kiriṁsu). -- ger. pakira (=pakiritvā) J.VI,100 (read pakira-cārī, cp. C. on p. 102), 198 (read p. --parī). -- Caus. pakireti 1. to throw down, upset Vin.IV,308 (thūpaṁ); S.I,100; It.90 (v. l. kīrati). -- 2. to scatter S.I,100=It.66; Pug.23. -- pp. pakiṇṇa (see °ka). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakitteti: {'def': '(pa + kitt + e), 高度评价，称赞，。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 pakittita。【现分】 ~yenta。【独】 ~tetvā。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+kitteti] to proclaim J.I,17 (v. 85). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+kitt+e), 高度评价，称赞，。【过】pakittesi。【过分】pakittita。【现分】pakitteyenta。【独】pakittetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakiṇāti: {'def': '[pa+kiṇāti] to deal in Vin.II,267 (grd. °kiṇitabba). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakiṇṇaka: {'def': '【形】到处散布的，各种的。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】到处散布的，各种的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pa+kiṇṇa (pp. of kirati)+ka] scattered about; fig. miscellaneous, particular, opp. to sādhāraṇa KhA 74; cp. Cpd. 13, 95²; Vism.175 (°kathā); 317 sq. (id.). -- As Np. name of the xiv^th book of the Jātakas. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakka: {'def': '(pacati 的【过分】), 已成熟，已煮沸，已烹调，已衰退。【中】成熟的水果。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Ved. pakva, a pp. formation of pac to cook, Idg. *peqǔo=Lat. coquo “cook,” Av. pac-, Obulg. pekaͅ, Lith. kepû, Gr. pέssw, a)rtokόpos baker, pέpwn ripe; also pp. of pacati pakta=Gr. peptόs, Lat. coctus] 1. ripe (opp. āma raw, as Vedic,; and apakka) and also “cooked, boiled, baked” S.I,97 (opp. āmaka); IV,324 (°bhikkhā); Sn.576; J.V,286. -- nt. pakkaṁ that which is ripe, i. e. a fruit, ripe fruit Pug.44, 45; often in connection with amba° i. e. a (ripe) mango fruit J.II,104, 394; Pv IV.12³; DhA.III,207; PvA.187. -- apakka unripe PugA 225; Sdhp.102. -- 2. ripe for destruction, overripe, decaying, in phrase °gatta (adj.) having a decaying body, with putrid body [BSk. pakvagātra Divy 82], comb^d with arugatta at M.I,506; S.IV,198; Miln.357 (cp. Miln.trsl. II.262), 395. -- 3. heated, glowing Dpvs.I,62.

--āsaya receptacle for digested food, i. e. the abdomen (opp. āmāsaya) Vism.260, 358; KhA 59. --odana (adj.) having cooked one’s rice Sn.18 (=siddhabhatta SnA 27), cp. J.III,425. --jjhāna “guessing at ripeness,” i. e. foretelling the number of years a man has yet to live; in list of forbidden crafts at D.I,9, expl^d at DA.I,94 as “paripāka-gata-cintā.” --pakka ripe fruit KhA 59. --pūva baked cake J.III,10. --vaṇṇin of ripe appearance Pug.44, 45, cp. PugA 225. --sadisa ripe-like, appearing ripe PugA 225. (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pacati 的【过分】), 已成熟，已煮沸，已烹调，已衰退。【中】成熟的水果。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakkama: {'def': '【阳】 ~mana, 【中】离开，走开。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】pakkamana,【中】离开，走开。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+kram] going to, undertaking, beginning D.I,168 (tapo°; trsl. “all kinds of penance”). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkamati: {'def': '(pa+kam(梵kram)超越+a), 向前走，走开。【过】pakkami。【过分】pakkanta。【现分】pakkamanta。【独】pakkamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + kam + a), 向前走，走开。【过】 pakkami。【过分】pakkanta。【现分】 pakkamanta。【独】 pakkamitvā。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Ved. prakramati, pra+kram] 1. to step forward, set out, go on, go away, go forth M.I,105; Pug.58; DA.I,94; PvA.13. -- pret. 3 sg. pakkāmi S.I,92, 120; Sn.pp. 93, 124; PvA.5 (uṭṭhāy’āsanā), 19 (id.); 3rd pl. pakkamuṁ Sn.1010, and pakkamiṁsu S.I,199. -- pp. pakkanta (q. v.). -- 2. to go beyond (in archery), to overshoot the mark, miss the aim Miln.250. (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkandati: {'def': '[Ved. prakrandati, pra+krand] to cry out, shout out, wail Sn.310 (3rd pret. pakkanduṁ) J.VI,55 (id.), 188 (id.), 301 (id.). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkanta: {'def': '[pp. of pakkamati] gone, gone away, departed S.I,153; Sn.p. 124; J.I,202 (spelt kkh); PvA.78. (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkava: {'def': '[etym. ?] a kind of medicinal plant Vin.I,201 (cp. paggava). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkaṭhati: {'def': '[pa+kaṭhati of kvath] to cook, boil up; only in Caus. II. pakkaṭṭhāpeti (with unexpl^d ṭṭh for ṭh) to cause to be boiled up J.I,472 (v. l. pakkuṭṭh°, cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 84). -- pp. pakkaṭhita (q. v.). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkaṭhita: {'def': 'Pakkaṭṭhita, Pakkuthita,【过分】很热，潜伏，煮沸(cooked up, boiled, boiling hot, hot)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pakkuthita) [also spelt with ṭṭh instead of ṭh or th, perhaps through popular etym. pakka+ṭṭhita for pa+kaṭhita. To kvath, P. kuthati & kaṭhati, appearing in pp. as kaṭhita, kuthita, kaṭṭhita and kuṭṭhita, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 42] cooked up, boiled, boiling hot, hot Thūpavaṁsa 48³³; J.V,268 (pakaṭṭh° vv. ll. pakkudh° & jakaṅkaṭhi); VI,112 (°kaṭṭh°), 114 (id.; v. l. BB °kuṭhita); DhA.I,126 (kaṭṭh°, v. l. pakkanta), 179 (kaṭṭh°, v. l. pakuṭṭh°); II,5 (kaṭṭh°, vv. ll. pakuṭṭh° & pakkuth°); III,310 (1^st passage kaṭṭh°, v. l. pakuṭṭh°, pakkuṭṭh°, pakkuthita;=pakkuṭṭhita at id. p. VvA.67; in 2^nd passage kaṭṭh°, v. l. pakuṭṭh° & pakkuthita, left out at id. p. VvA.68); ThA.292 (pakkuthita). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkaṭṭhita: {'def': '【过分】很热，潜伏，煮沸。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakkaṭṭhī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pa+kvat, evidently as abstr. to pakkaṭṭhita; reading uncertain] a boiling (-hot) mixture (of oil?) M.I,87, expl^d by C. as katita- (=kaṭh°) gomaya, boiling cow-dung, v. l. chakaṇakā see p. 537. The id. p. at Nd² 199 reads chakaṇaṭī, evidently a bona fide reading. The interpretation as “cow-dung” is more likely than “boiling oil.” (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkha: {'def': '³ [cp. Sk. phakka (?)] a cripple. Cp III,6, 10; J.VI,12 (=pīṭha-sappī C.). Note BSk. phakka is enum^d at Mvyut. 271¹²⁰ with jātyaṇḍa, kuṇḍa & paṅgu, reminding of the combⁿ kāṇo vā kuṇi vā khañjo vā pakkhahato vā Vin.II,90=S.I,94=A.II,85; III,385.=Pug.51. Pakkhaka (& °ika) (nt.?) [fr. pakkha¹] a dress made of wings or feathers, in cpd. ulūka° of owl’s wings (see ulūka°) Vin.III,34 (°ṁ nivāsetvā); A.II,206 ≈ (°ika). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Ved. pakṣa in meanings 1 and 3; to Lat. pectus, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] 1. side of the body, flank, wing, feathers (cp. pakkhin), in cpds. °biḷāla a flying fox (sort of bat) Bdhgh on ulūka-camma at Vin.I,186 (MV. V,2, 4; cp. Vin. Texts II.16 where read ulūka° for lūka?); J.VI,538; and °hata one who is struck on (one) side, i. e. paralysed on one side, a cripple (cp. Sk. pakṣāghāta) Vin.II,90; M.III,169; A.III,385; Pug.51 (=hatapakkho pīṭhasappi PugA 227); Miln.245, 276 (cp. Miln.trsl. II.62, 117) -- also as wing of a house at DhsA.107; and wing of a bird at S.II,231; SnA 465 (in explⁿ of pakkhin). -- 2. side, party, faction; adj (-°) associated with, a partisan, adherent Vin.II,299; Sn.347 (aññāṇa°), 967 (kaṇhassa p.=Māra° etc., see Nd¹ 489; Nett 53 (taṇhā° & diṭṭhi°) 88 (id.), 160 (id.); DA.I,281; DhA.I,54; PvA.114 (paṭiloma°). pakkhasaṅkanta gone over to a (schismatic) faction Vin.I,60; IV,230, 313. -- pakkhaṁ dāpeti to give a side, to adhere to (Loc.) J.I,343. -- 3. one half of the (lunar) month, a fortnight. The light or moon-lit fortnight is called sukka-pakkha (or juṇha°), the dark or moonless one kāḷa° (or kaṇha°) M.I,20 (cātuddasī pañcadasī aṭṭhamī ca pakkhassa 14^th, 15^th & 8^th day of the fortnight) ≈ Sn.402; A.I,142 (aṭṭhamī pakkhassa), 144=Vv 15⁶ (cātuddasī etc.; cp. VvA.71): A.V,123 sq. (kāḷa°, juṇha°); Th.2, 423 (=aḍḍhamāsa-mattaṁ ThA.269); Pv.II,95⁵ (bahumāse ca pakkhe ca=kaṇha-sukka-bheda p. PvA.135); Vism.101 (dasâhaṁ vā pakkhaṁ vā); VvA.314 (sukka°); PvA.55 (kāḷa°). -- 4. alternative, statement, Loc. pakkhe (-°) with regard or reference to KhA 80 (tassa pañhassa vyākaraṇapakkhe); SnA 168 (id.). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】旁边，党，派系，身边，侧面，翅膀，半个月份。【形】信徒，和…共事的。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】跛子，跛足的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】跛子，跛足的人。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [cp. Ved. prakhya clear, & Sk. (-°) prakhya like, of pra+khyā] visible, clear; --° resembling, like Miln.75 (mātu° and pitu°). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】旁边，党，派系，身边，侧面，翅膀，半个月份。【形】信徒，和…共事的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakkhabilāla: {'def': '【阳】狐蝠，果蝠。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】果蝠(flying-fox)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakkhalana: {'def': 'pakkhalita, 【中】绊倒。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'pakkhalita,【中】绊倒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakkhalati: {'def': '1(pa+ksal), 洗，冲洗(to wash, cleanse) (ger. pakkhalya=dhovitvā). caus. pakkhāleti.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (pa+khal+a) 绊倒、踉跄、蹒跚(to stumble, trip, stagger)。【过】pakkhali。【过分】pakkhalita。【独】pakkhalitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pa+khalati, of skhal] to stumble, trip, stagger J.III,433; VI,332; DA.I,37; DhsA.334. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + khal + a), 绊倒，蹒跚。【过】 ~khali。【过分】 ~lita。【独】~litvā。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [pa+kṣal] to wash, cleanse J.V,71 (ger. pakkhalya=dhovitvā C. p. 74). Caus. pakkhāleti (q. v.). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhandaka: {'def': '(adj.)=pakkhandin SnA 164. -- f. pakkhandikā [Ved. (?) praskandikā, BR. without refs.] diarrhœa, dysentery D.II,127 (lohita°); J.III,143; V,441 (lohita°); Miln.134. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhandana: {'def': '【中】1.跃，跳(leaping, springing)。2.攻击，追(attack, assault, chasing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pakkhandati] 1. leaping, springing J.II,32; Ps.1. 194 (pariccāga- & pakkh°- nissagga). ‹-› 2. attack, assault, chasing DhA.I,198. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】跃出，跳，追。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakkhandati: {'def': '[pa+khandati, of skand] to spring forward, to jump on to M.I,86; J.I,461; Vv 84¹² (ger. pakkhandiyāna=pakkhanditvā anupavisitvā VvA.338); to be after someone in pursuit DhA.I,198; usually fig. to rejoice in, find pleasure or satisfaction in (Loc.), to take to, in phrases cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati M.I,186; S.III,133; cp. Miln.326 (nibbāne); A.II,165; III,245 (avyāpāde); IV,442 (adukkha-m-asukhe); It.43 (dhamme); and na me tattha mānasaṁ p. Miln.135. ‹-› pp. pakkhanna (q. v.). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+khandh(梵skand)+a), 向前跳，跳上(to spring forward, to jump on)。【过】pakkhandi。【过分】pakkhanta。【独】pakkhanditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + khandh + a), 向前跳，跳上。【过】 ~ndi。【过分】pakkhanta。【独】 ~nditvā。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakkhandikā: {'def': '【阴】痢疾，腹泻。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】痢疾(dysentery)，腹泻(diarrhoea)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakkhandin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pakkhandati] 1. (adj.) bold, braggart, lit. jumping on or forth Dh.244; Sn.89 (=pakkhandaka SnA 164). -- 2. a military scout, lit. an onrusher, a bravo D.I,51 (cp. Dial. I.68); DA.I,157; J.II,32, 281. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhandī: {'def': '【阳】跳上者，吹嘘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】跳上者，吹嘘。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakkhanna: {'def': '[pp. of pakkhandati; often wrongly spelt pakkhanta] jumped on, fallen on to or into, chanced upon, acquired M.I,39; Th.1, 342 (diṭṭhigahanā°); J.V,471; Miln.144 (saṁsaya°), 156, 390 (kupatha°). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhanta: {'def': 'at DA.I,38 read as pakkanta. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhara: {'def': '[cp. Sk. prakṣara & prakhara “ein Panzer für Pferde” BR.] bordering, trimming J.VI,223 (of a carriage). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pakkha¹] being a partner of, siding in with Vism.129, 130. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhepa: {'def': '【阳】参考 Pakkhipana。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m.) & °na (nt.) [fr. pa+ kṣip] throwing, hurling; being thrown into (Loc.) PvA.221 (lohakumbhi° in passage of ordeals in Niraya); DhA.I,357 (nadiyaṁ visa-pakkhepana). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】放进，丢入。参考 Pakkhipana。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakkhika: {'def': '【形】派系的，偏袒的，半个月份的。pakkhikabhatta,【中】半个月才给一次的食物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [for pakkhiya=Ved. pakṣya of pakkha¹ 3] 1. belonging or referring to the (2) lunar fortnights, fortnightly, for a fortnight or in the (specified) fortnight of the month (cp. Vin. Texts III,220). As one special provision of food mentioned in enumⁿ of five bhojanāni, viz. niccabhatta, salākabhatta, pakkhika, uposathika, pāṭipadika, Vin.I,58=II.175; IV,75; J.II,210; Vism.66. -- 2. (cp. pakkha 2 & pakkhin 2) contributing to, leading to, associated with, siding with (-°) Vism.130, in phrase vighāta° anibbāna-saṁvattanika associated with destruction, etc. M.I,115; DhsA.382. Also in mūga° leading to deafness J.I,45 (V.254). ‹-› DhA.I,82 (paramattha-sacca°). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】属于派系的，偏袒的，半个月份的。 ~bhatta, 【中】半个月才给一次的食物。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakkhima: {'def': '[=pakkhin] a bird Th.1, 139 (read °me for °maṁ); J.V,339. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pakkha¹=pakkhānaṁ atthitāya pakkhī ti vuccati SnA 465; Ved. pakṣin bird] 1. winged, the winged one, a bird D.I,71 (+sakuṇa=pakkhayutto sakuṇo DA.I,208)=A.II,209=V.206=Pug.58, S.II,231; Sn.606 (=sakuṇo SnA 465); Pv III,5³ (°gaṇā =sakuṇagaṇā PvA.198). -- 2. (cp. pakkha 2) participating in, contributing to S.V,97 (vighāta° for the usual °pakkhika). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhipana: {'def': '【中】放进，丢入。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】放进，丢入。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakkhipati: {'def': '(pa+khip抛+a), 放进，封住装入，丢入。【过】pakkhipi。【现分】pakkhipanta。【独】pakkhipitvā。【义】pakkhipitabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + khip + a), 放进，封住装入，丢入。【过】 ~khipi。【现分】~panta。【独】 ~pitvā。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+ kṣip, in sense of putting down carefully cp. nikkhipati & BSk. prakṣipati to start a ship Divy 334] 1. to put down into (with Loc. of receptacle), place into, enclose in (often used for ceremony of putting a corpse into a shell or mount) D.II,162 (tela-doṇiyā Bhagavato sarīraṁ p.); S.II,85; J.II,210 (mukhe); Miln.247 (Amat’osadhaṁ); PvA.41 (atthikāni thūpe p.); DhA.I,71 (the corpse into the fire). -- 2. to throw into, hurl into, in Niraya-passage at M.III,183=A.I,141= Nd² 304^III; cp. nikkhipati. -- 3. (fig.) to include in, insert, arrange, interpolate Miln.13 (Abhidhammapiṭakaṁ kusalā dhammā, akusalā dh., avyākatā dh. ti tīsu padesu p.). -- Caus. II. pakkhipāpeti J.I,467; DA.I,136. -- pp. pakkhitta (q. v.). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhitta: {'def': '(Pakkhipati的【过分】) 已放进，已丢进。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pakkhipati] put down into, thrown into (Loc.) Sn.p. 15 (pāyāso udake p.); PvA.58 (ātave p. naḷo is perhaps better read ātāpe paditto), 153 (pokkharaṇiyaṁ p.). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhiya: {'def': '【形】成分的，派系的，偏袒的，半个月份的。参考 pakkhika。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】参考 pakkhika。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pakkha¹ 2; cp. pakkhikā] siding with, associating with; m. part, side; only in phrase (satta-tiṁsa-) bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā the 37 parts of enlightenment It.75 (satta only); J.I,275; Vism.678 sq.; SnA 164; VvA.95; see Cpd. 179 and note 1. ‹-› pakkhiya at Th.2, 425 is not clear (expl^d at ThA.269 by vaccha, v. l. sacca). (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhāleti: {'def': '(pa + khal + e), 洗，纯净，冲洗。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~lita。【独】 ~letvā。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+khal(梵ksal)+e), 洗，冲洗。【过】pakkhālesi。【过分】pakkhālita。【独】pakkhāletvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pa+ksal, cp. khaleti] to wash, cleanse Vin.I,9 (pāde); D.II,85 (id.); M.I,205; S.I,107; J.VI,24 (pāde); VvA.261. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkhāyati: {'def': '[pa+khyā, Ved. prakhyāyate; cp. khāyati & pakkha²] to appear, shine forth, to be clearly visible D.II,99 (cp. Th.1, 1034, where pakkhanti for pakkhāyanti metri causâ); M.II,32; S.IV,144; V,153, 162; A.III,69 sq. (Page 381)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+khyā见, Ved. prakhyāyate; cp. khāyati & pakkha2),出现(to appear)，明显可见的(to be clearly visible)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakkhī: {'def': '【阳】鸟，有翼的。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】鸟，有翼的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakkosana: {'def': '【中】 Pakkosanā, 【阴】呼叫。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】pakkosanā,【阴】呼叫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakkosati: {'def': '(pa+kus(梵kruw)大叫+a), 呼叫，召唤。【过】pakkosi。【过分】pakkosita。【独】pakkositvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + kus + a), 呼叫，召唤。【过】 ~kosi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】~sitvā。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+kosati, kruś] to call, summon J.I,50; II,69, 252 (=avheti); V,297; VI,420; DhA.I,50; PvA.81 (v. l. °āpeti). -- Caus. II. pakkosāpeti to call, send for, order to come J.I,207; PvA.141, 153; DhA.I,185. (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkula: {'def': 'see pākula. (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakkāmi: {'def': '(pakkamati的【过完】), 他往前去了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakopa: {'def': '[pa+kopa] agitation, effervescence, anger, fury Dhs.1060; Vism.235, 236. (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+kopa),【阳】激怒(agitation)，愤怒，激动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】激怒，愤怒，激动。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakopana: {'def': '【形】使狂暴的，煽动的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pa+kopana, of kup] shaking, upsetting, making turbulent It.84 (moho citta-pakopano). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】使狂暴的，煽动的。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakubbati: {'def': '(pa+kar行+o, karo 被改成 kubba), 做，制造，运行。【现分】pakubbamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + kar + o, karo 被改成 kubba), 做，制造，运行。【现分】~bbamāna。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakubb°: {'def': 'see pakaroti. (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakudha-Kaccāyana: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Kakuda-Kātyāyana 六師之一] 波拘陀迦旃延, 迦求陀迦旃延.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Kakuda-Kātyāyana 六師の一] 波拘陀迦旃延, 迦求陀迦旃延.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Pakujjhati: {'def': '[pa+krudh] to be angry S.I,221, 223 (°eyyaṁ). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakuppati: {'def': '(pa+kup+ya), 生气。【过】pakuppi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + kup + ya), 生气。【过】 ~ppi。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+kup] to be angry J.IV,241. (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakuṭa: {'def': '(?) [v. l. pakuṭṭa] an inner verandah Vin.II,153; cp. Vin. Texts III,175. -- Kern. Toev. s. v. expl^d it as miswriting for pakuṭṭha (=Sk. prakoṣṭha an inner court in a building, Prk. paoṭṭha, cp. P. koṭṭha¹ & koṭṭhaka¹). Spelling pakulla at Nd² 485 B (for magga, v. l. makula). (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakāra: {'def': '【阳】种类，模式，方法，样子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】模式，方法，样子，方法。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+kṛ, cp. last; but Sk. prakāra “similarity”] 1. make-up, getting up, fixing, arrangement, preparation, mode, way, manner J.II,222; DA.I,132; PvA.26, 109, 123, 135, 178, 199; Sdhp.94, 466. -- 2. ingredient, flavour, way of making (a food) tasty Sn.241 (kathappakāro tava āmagandho); Miln.63. -- 3. (-°) of a kind, by way of, in nānā° (adj.) various, manifold J.I,52 (sakuṇā), 278 (phalāni); PvA.50; vutta° as said, the said Vism.42, 44; PvA.136. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakāraka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. pakāra] of that kind S.II,81; J.VI,259. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. pakāra) ,【形】种类的(of that kind)。nānappakāraka,不同种类的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakāreti: {'def': '[denom. fr. pakāra] to direct one’s thought towards (Dat.) J.VI,307. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakāsa: {'def': '【阳】光亮，报喜，解释。pakāsaka,【阳】出版者，宣布者，解释者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】光亮，报喜，解释。 ~ka, 【阳】出版者，宣布者，解释者。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakāsana: {'def': '(nt.) [pa+kāś, cp. pakāsati] explaining, making known; information, evidence, explanation, publicity Ps.I,104 (dhamma°); Miln.95; SnA 445; PvA.2, 50, 103 (explⁿ of āvi). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】光亮，宣告，公开。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】光亮，宣告，公开。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pakāsati: {'def': '(pa+kās +a), 能看得见，被知道，照耀。【过】pakāsi。【过分】pakāsita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+kāś] to shine forth, to be visible, to become known Sn.445, 1032 (=bhāsati tapati virocati Nd² 373). -- Caus. pakāseti to show up, illustrate, explain, make known, give information about Vin.II,189; S.I,105; It.111 (brahmacariyaṁ); Dh.304; Sn.578, 1021; Pug.57; J.VI,281 (atthaṁ to explain the meaning or matter); DhA.II,11 (id.); PvA.1, 12 (ānisaṁsaṁ) 29 (atthaṁ upamāhi), 32 (attānaṁ), 40 (adhippāyaṁ), 42 (saccāni) 72 etc. -- grd. pakāsaniya to be made known or announced in °kamma explanation, information, annunciation Vin.II,189 (cp. Vin. Texts III,239). -- pp. pakāsita (q. v.). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + kās + a), 能看得见，被知道，照耀。【过】 pakāsi。【过分】pakāsita。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakāseti: {'def': '(pa+kās+e), 使知道，举例说明，出版。【过】pakāsesi。【过分】pakāsita。【现分】pakāsenta。【独】pakāsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + kās + e), 使知道，举例说明，出版。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【现分】 ~senta。【独】 ~setvā。(p185)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pakāsita: {'def': '[pp. of pakāseti] explained, manifested, made known S.I,161, 171 sq.; II,107 (su°); PvA.53, 63. (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pakūjin: {'def': '(adj.) [pa+kūj] to sing out to (each other) (aññamaññaṁ) J.VI,538. (Page 380)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pala: {'def': '(-°) [classical Sk. pala] a certain weight (or measure), spelt also phala (see phala²), only in cpd. sata° a hundred (carat) in weight Th.1, 97 (of kaṁsa); J.VI,510 (sataphala kaṁsa=phalasatena katā kañcana-pātī C.). Also in combⁿ catuppala -- tippala -- dvipala -- ekapala -- sāṭikā Vism.339. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】斤（一种重量，大约 4 盎司）。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'pala-(classical Sk. pala),【中】斤(一种重量，大约 4 盎司)(a certain weight (or measure), spelt also phala (see phala2), only in cpd. satapala a hundred (carat) in weight Th.1, 97 (of kaṁsa); J.VI,510 (sataphala kaṁsa=phalasatena katā kañcana-pātī C.). Also in combn catuppala -- tippala -- dvipala -- ekapala -- sāṭikā Vism.339.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paladdha: {'def': '[pp. of pa+labh] taken over, “had,” overcome, deceived M.I,511 (nikata vañcita p. where v. l. and id. p. S.IV,307 however reads paluddha); J.III,260 (dava°= abhibhūta C.). (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palagaṇḍa: {'def': '【阳】泥瓦匠。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. palagaṇḍa Halāyudha II.436; BSk. palagaṇḍa AvW I.339; Asṭas. Pār. 231; Avad. Kalp. II.113),【阳】大厦，泥瓦匠(a mason, bricklayer, plasterer)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. palagaṇḍa Halāyudha II.436; BSk. palagaṇḍa AvŚ I.339; Aṣṭas. Pār. 231; Avad. Kalp. II.113] a mason, bricklayer, plasterer M.I,119; S.III,154 (the reading phala° is authentic, see Geiger, P.G. § 40); A.IV,127. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palahati: {'def': '[pa+lahati] to lick Pv III,5²=PvA.198. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palaka: {'def': '[cp. late Sk. pala, flesh, meat] a species of plant J.VI,564. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palambati: {'def': '[pa+lambati] to hang down ThA.210; Sdhp.110. -- pp. palambita (q. v.). See also abhi°. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palambheti: {'def': '[pa+lambheti] to deceive D.I,50, cp. DA.I,151. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palambita: {'def': '[pp. of palambati] hanging down Th.2, 256, 259; ThA.211. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palapana: {'def': 'palapita, 【中】废话。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'palapita,【中】废话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palapati: {'def': '[pa+lapati] to talk nonsense J.II,322. Cp. vi°. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+lap唠叨+a), 胡说(to talk nonsense)。【过】palapi。【过分】palapita。【独】palapitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + lap + a), 胡说。【过】 palapi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~pitvā。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Palasata: {'def': '(possibly fr. Sk. parasvant), 犀牛(a rhinoceros J.VI.277 (v. l. phalasata; expld as “khagga-miga,” with gloss “balasata”); as phalasata at J.VI.454 (expld as phalasata-camma C.))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[according to Trenckner, Notes p. 59, possibly fr. Sk. parasvant] a rhinoceros J.VI,277 (v. l. phalasata; expl^d as “khagga-miga,” with gloss “balasata”); as phalasata at J.VI,454 (expl^d as phalasata-camma C.). See palāsata. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palavati: {'def': '(Vedic plavati, plu), 游泳(to float, swim Vin.IV,112; Dh.334; Th.1, 399; J.III.190.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic plavati, plu] to float, swim Vin.IV,112; Dh.334; Th.1, 399; J.III,190. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palaḷita: {'def': '[pa+laḷita] led astray S.IV,197 (v. l. °lāḷita). At A.III,5 we read palāḷita, in phrase kāmesu p. (“sporting in pleasures”? Or should we read palolita?). (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palaṇḍu: {'def': 'palaṇḍuka(cp. Epic Sk. palāṇḍu, pala (white)+aṇḍu (=aṇḍa? egg),【阳】洋葱(onion﹐原产亚洲的植物 (Allium cepa)，味道强烈，广泛用作蔬菜)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'palaṇḍuka, 【阳】洋葱（广泛栽培的，原产亚洲的植物 (Allium cepa)，具有细长的空心管状的叶和可食的由容易分层的、以紧密同心圆组成的圆形鳞茎，味道强烈，广泛用作蔬菜）。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Palaṇḍuka: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. palāṇḍu, pala (white)+aṇḍu (=aṇḍa? egg)] an onion Vin.IV,259. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palepa: {'def': '[fr. pa+lip] smearing; plaster, mortar Th.2, 270; ThA.213. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palepana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+lip] smearing, anointing; adj. (-°) smeared or coated with M.I,429 (gāḷha° thickly smeared). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paleti: {'def': '参考 palāyati。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '逃走，逃脱。参考 palāyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see palāyati. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palibhañjana: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+bhañjana] breaking up Nd² 576 (sambhañjana+; v. l. pari°). See also sam°. The spelling phali° occurs at ThA.288. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palibodha: {'def': '[see palibuddhati] obstruction, hindrance, obstacle, impediment, drawback J.I,148; III,241 (a° non-obstruction), 381 (id.); Nett 80; also in var. phrases, viz. kāma° Nd² 374 (+kāmapariḷāha); kula° cīvara° Nd² 68, cp. Miln.388 (kule p.); ghar’āvāsa°, putta-dāro etc. Nd¹ 136; Nd² 172^a B, 205, cp. J.II,95 (ghara°); KhA 39 (enum^d as set of dasa palibodhā which are also given and expl^d in detail at Vism.90 sq.); cp. DhsA.168, and in combⁿ laggana bandhana p. Nd² 332, 620. Two palibodhas are referred to at Vin.I,265, viz. āvāsa° and cīvara° (cp. Vin. Texts II.157) and sixteen at Miln.11. Cp. Cpd. 53. -- The minor obstacles (to the practice of kammaṭṭhāna) are described as khuddaka° at Vism.122 & referred to at DhsA.168. -- See also sam°. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palibuddha: {'def': '[pp. of palibujjhati] obstructed, hindered, stopped; being kept back or delayed, tarrying J.II,417; Nd² 107 (paliveṭhita+); Miln.388 (ākāso a°) 404; DhA.III,198. Often in phrase lagga laggita p. Nd² 88, 107, 332, 596, 597, 657. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palibuddhati: {'def': '[the etym. offered by Andersen, Pāli Reader s. v. palibuddha, viz. dissimilation for pari+ruddhati (rudh) is most plausible, other expl^ns like Trenckner’s (Notes 66 for pari+bādh, med-pass. bajjhati=*bādhyate, seemingly confirmed by v. l. Nd² 74 & 77 °bajjhati for °bujjhati) and Kern’s (Toev. s. v.=Ogh. firbiotan, Ger. verbieten) are semantically not satisfactory. Cp. avaruddhati & avaruddha] 1. to obstruct, refuse, keep back, hinder, withhold Vin.II,166; IV,42, 131; J.I,217 (cp. paṭibāhati ibid.); III,138 (aor. °buddhi.); IV,159; Miln.263. -- 2. to delay Miln.404 (or should we read °bujjhati i. e. sticks, tarries, is prevented?). ‹-› Pass. palibujjhati [this word occurs only in Commentary style & late works. In the Niddesa the nearest synonym is lag, as seen from the freq. combⁿ palibuddha+lagga, palibodha+laggana: see Nd² p. 188 under nissita] to be obstructed or hindered, to be kept by (Instr. or Loc.) to stick or adhere to, to trouble about, attend to Nd² 74, 77 (paligijjhati+), 88, 107, 597, 657; Miln.263. -- pp. palibuddha (q. v.). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palibujjhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. palibujjhati] obstruction DhA.III,258. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palibujjhati: {'def': 'see palibuddhati. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paligedha: {'def': '[pali+gedha but Acc. to Geiger, P.Gr. § 10= parigṛddha] greed, conceit, selfishness A.I,66; Nd² taṇhā II (gedha+); Dhs.1059, 1136. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pali遍+gedha贪), 贪得无厌(遍贪wanting everything)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paligedhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paligedha, but Geiger, P.Gr. § 10 takes it as *parigṛddhin, cp. giddhin] conceited, greedy, selfish A.III,265. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paligha: {'def': '﹐【阳】门闩(ㄕㄨㄢ,门的横关)，门拴(ㄕㄨㄢ)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+gha of (g)han, cp. P. & Sk. parigha] 1. a cross-bar Vin.II,154; Th.2, 263 (vaṭṭa°=parighadaṇḍa ThA.211); J.II,95; VI,276. -- 2. an obstacle, hindrance D.II,254=S.I,27. -- (adj) (-°) in two phrases: okkhitta° with cross-bars erected or put up D.I,105 (=ṭhapita° DA.I,274), opp. ukkhitta° with cross-bars (i. e. obstacles) withdrawn or removed M.I,139=A.III,84=Nd² 284 C.; Sn.622 (=avijjā-palighassa ukkhittattā SnA 467); cp. parikhā.

--parivattika turning round of the bar the “Bar Turn,” a kind of punishment or torture (consisting in “a spike being driven from ear to ear he is pinned to the ground” Hardy, E.M. 32, cp. Miln.trsl. I.277) M.I,87=A.I,47=II.122=Nd¹ 154=Nd² 604 B (reads paliṅgha, v. l. paligha)=Miln.197. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paligijjhati: {'def': '[pali+gijjhati] to be greedy Nd² 77 (abhigijjhati+). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paliguṇṭhita: {'def': '[pali+guṇṭhita, variant palikuṇṭhita, as kuṇṭhita & guṇḍhita are found] entangled, covered, enveloped Sn.131 (mohena; v. l. BB °kuṇṭhita); J.II,150=DhA.I,144 (v. l. °kuṇṭh°); IV,56; Miln.II, Expl^d by pariyonaddha J.II,150, by paṭicchādita J.IV,56. Cp. pāliguṇṭhima. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palikha: {'def': '[a variant of paligha on kh for gh see Geiger, P.Gr. § 39²] a bar J.VI,276 (with palighā as gloss). (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palikhata: {'def': '[pp. of palikhaṇati] dug round or out S.IV,83 (so read with v. l. for T. palikhita). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palikhati: {'def': '[pa+likh] to scratch, in phrase oṭṭhaṁ p. to bite one’s lip J.V,434=DhA.IV,197. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palikhaṇati: {'def': '[pali+khaṇ, cp. parikhā] to dig up, root out S.I,123; II,88 (so read for paliṁ° & phali°)=A.I,204; ger. palikhañña Sn.968 (=uddharitvā Nd¹ 490); palikhāya S.I,123 (cp. KS 320); & palikhaṇitvā S.II,88; SnA 573. -- pp. palikhata (q. v.). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palikhādati: {'def': '[pali+khādati] to bite all round, to gnaw or peck off M.I,364 (kukkuro aṭṭhikaṅkalaṁ p.). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palikujjati: {'def': '[pali+kujjati] to bend oneself over, to go crooked M.I,387. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palikuṇṭhita: {'def': '[a var. of paliguṇṭhita, q. v. & cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 39¹] covered, enveloped, smeared with J.II,92 (lohita°). (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palimaṭṭha: {'def': '(Parimajjaka的【过分】)﹐已磨光(polished)。cp. parimaṭṭha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pari+mṛj] polished J.V,4. Cp. parimaṭṭha. See also sam°. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palipa: {'def': '【阳】沼泽。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'fr. [pa+lip] sloppiness, mud, marsh M.I,45; Th.1, 89; 2, 291 (=paṅka ThA.224); J.III,241 (read palipo, cp. C.=mahākaddamo ibid.)=IV.480. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】沼泽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palipadaka: {'def': 'see pāli°. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palipanna: {'def': '【过分】已跌进，已沉入。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已跌进，已沉入。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[for paripanna, pp. of paripajjati] fallen, got or sunk into (-° or Loc.) Vin.I,301 (muttakarīse); D.II,24 (id.); M.I,45 (palipa°)=Nd² 651 B; M.I,88; J.VI,8; Vism.49 (muttakarīse). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palipatha: {'def': '【阳】危险的道路，困难的路径。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】危险的道路，困难的路径。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[for paripatha=°pantha (q. v.), the bases path° & panth° frequently interchanging. Trenckner (Notes 80) derives it fr. pa+lip] danger, obstacle (or is it “mud, mire”=palipa?) A.IV,290; Sn.34=638 (= rāga° SnA 469)=Dh.414 (=rāga° DhA.IV,194). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palippati: {'def': '[Med.-Pass. of pa+lip; often spelt palimpati] to be smeared; to stick, to adhere to Pv IV.1⁵ (°amāna read for palimpamāna). -- pp. palitta (q. v.). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palisajjati: {'def': '[pari+sṛj] to loosen, make loose S.II,89 (mūlāni). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palissajati: {'def': '[pari+svaj] to embrace D.II,266; J.V,158 (aor. palissaji=ālingi C). 204, 215; VI,325. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palissuta: {'def': '[pp. of pari+sru] flowing over J.VI,328. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palita: {'def': '【形】成熟的。【中】白头发。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】成熟的。【中】白头发。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic palita; Gr. pelitnόs, peliόs black-grey; Lith. pilkas grey; Ags. fealu=Ohg. falo, E. fallow, Ger. fahl; also Sk. pāṇḍu whitish; P. paṇḍu, pāṭala pink] grey, in cpd. °kesa with grey (i. e. white) hair M.I,88 (f. °kesī); A.I,138; J.I,59, 79; abs. only at J.VI,524. The spelling phalita also occurs (e. g. PvA.153). -- Der. pālicca. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palitta: {'def': '[pp. of palippati] smeared Th.2, 467 (=upalitta ThA.284). (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paliveṭhana: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. pari+veṣṭ] wrapping, surrounding, encircling, encumbrance J.IV,436; Pug.34; Vism.353 (°camma); DhsA.366. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paliveṭheti: {'def': '[pari+veṣṭ] to wrap up, cover, entwine, encircle M.I,134; J.I,192; II,95; DhA.I,269; DhsA.366. -- Pass. paliveṭhīyati Miln.74. -- pp. paliveṭhita (q. v.). See also sam°. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paliveṭhita: {'def': '[pp. of paliveṭheti] wrapped round, entwined, encircled, fettered Nd² 107 (°veṭṭh°, comb^d with laggita & palibuddha); J.IV,436; VI,89. Cp. sam°. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pali°: {'def': '(=pari°, 摩揭陀语，当接头词)圆(round)，遍(around)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[a variant of pari°, to be referred to the Māgadhī dialect in which it is found most frequently, esp. in the older language, see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 257; Geiger, P.Gr. § 44] round, around (=pari) only as prefix in cpds. (q. v.). Often we find both pari° & pali° in the same word. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pallala: {'def': '【中】小湖。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.沼泽地(marshy ground)。2.小湖(a small pond or lake)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Class Sk. palvala=Lat. palus; Ohg. felawa Q Ger. felber willow; Lith. pélkè moor; BSk. also palvala, e. g. Divy 56] 1. marshy ground M.I,117; S.III,108 sq. -- 2. a small pond or lake Vin.I,230= D.II,89; J.II,129; V,346. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pallati: {'def': '(pallate), is guarded or kept, contracted (poetical) form of pālayate (so Cy.) J.V,242. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pallattha: {'def': '(Sk. *paryasta, pari+pp. of as to throw, cp. Prk. Pallattha), 抱住膝盖而坐(the posture of sitting or squatting or lolling)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. *paryasta, pari+pp. of as to throw, cp. Prk pallattha Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 285] the posture of sitting or squatting or lolling J.I,163 (here in explⁿ of tipallattha: pallatthaṁ vuccati sayanaṁ, ubhohi passehi ujukam eva ca go-nisinnaka-vasenā ti tīh’ākārehi pallatthaṁ etc.; see under ti°). Cp. ti°, vi°. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pallatthikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pallattha] same meaning as pallattha Vin.II,213; III,162 (cp. Vin. Texts I.62; III,141); Vism.79 (dussa°). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】有坐位的轿子。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】抱住膝盖而坐。【bhikkhu sekhiya 26】︰Na pallatthikāya antaraghare nisīdissāmī’ti, sikkhā karaṇīyā.(「在住宅区，我不要抱住膝盖坐」，应当学。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pallatthita: {'def': '[doubtful, perhaps we should read paliyattha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.] perverse J.V,79. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pallava: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Class Sk. pallaka] a sprout J.I,250; II,161. See also phallava. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Class Sk. pallaka),【中】1.新鲜的叶子，苗芽(a sprout)。2.钵罗婆国。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】新鲜的叶子，苗芽，钵罗婆国。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pallavita: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pallava] having sprouts, burgeoning, budding Miln.151; VvA.288 (sa° full of sprouts). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pallaṅka: {'def': '【阳】沙发，长椅，盘腿坐。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+aṅka膝；cp. Class Sk. palyaṅka & Māgadhī paliyaṅka),【阳】1.盘腿坐(跏趺坐)( sitting cross-legged, in Instr. pallaṅkena upon the hams S.I,124, 144)。pallaṅkaṁ ābhujati(梵语 paryavkam ābhujya)﹐结跏趺(弯跏趺)，叠足盘坐(“to bend (the legs) in crosswise”；ābhujati︰结、弯、组)。跏，为「加」之别写；趺，是脚背。诸坐法中，结跏趺坐最安稳而不易疲倦。叠一足在另一足之上为半跏趺坐；叠两足为全跏趺坐。2.床座、轿(肩舆)，英语palankeen或palanquin。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pary+aṅka, cp. Class Sk. palyaṅka & Māgadhī paliyaṅka] 1. sitting cross-legged, in Instr. pallaṅkena upon the hams S.I,124, 144; and in phrase pallaṅkaṁ ābhujati “to bend (the legs) in crosswise” D.I,71; M.I,56; A.III,320; J.I,17, 71; Ps.I,176; Pug.68; Miln.289; DhA.II,201. -- This phrase is expl^d at Vism.271 and VbhA.368 as “samantato ūru-baddh’āsanaṁ bandhati.” -- 2. a divan, sofa, couch Vin.II,163, 170 (cp. Vin. Texts III,209, which is to be corrected after Dial. I.12); D.I,7; S.I,95; J.I,268; IV,396; V,161; Vv 31¹; Pv.II,12⁷; III,3²; DhA.I,19; PvA.189, 219. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palloma: {'def': '[a contraction of pannaloma, see J.P.T.S. 1889, 206] security, confidence D.I,96; M.I,17; cp. DA.I,266 “loma-haṁsa-mattam pi ‘ssa na bhavissati.” (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pallāsa: {'def': 'see vi°. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palobha: {'def': '(fr. pa+ lubh (梵lubh)执取), 欲望(desire, greed PvA.265.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+lubh] desire, greed PvA.265. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palobhana: {'def': '(=palobha),【中】引诱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】引诱。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.)=palobha J.I,196, 210; II,183; Miln.286. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palobheti: {'def': '(pa + lubh + e), 引诱，勾引。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~bhita。【独】~bhetvā。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pa+lubh] to desire, to be greedy Sn.703; J.I,79, 157, 298; VI,215; SnA 492; DhA.I,123, 125; PvA.55. -- pp. palobhita (q. v.). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+lubh (梵lubh)执取+e), caus.引诱，勾引(to desire, to be greedy)。【过】palobhesi。【过分】palobhita。【独】palobhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palobhita: {'def': '[pp. of palobheti] desired PvA.154. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. of palobheti), 欲望(desired)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paloka: {'def': '[fr. pa+*luj=ruj, thus standing for *paloga, cp. roga] breaking off or in two, dissolution, decay Vin.II,284; M.I,435=Miln.418 (in formula aniccato dukkhato rogato etc., with freq. v. l. paralokato; cp. A.IV,423; Nd² 214; Ps.II,238); S.III,167 (id.) IV.53; V, 163. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa-ruj)﹐【阳】破坏，败坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palokin: {'def': '(fr. paloka),【形】(destined for decay or destruction)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paloka] destined for decay or destruction S.IV,205=Sn.739 (Acc. palokinaṁ=jarā-maraṇehi palujjana-dhamma SnA 506); Th.2, 101 (Acc. pl. palokine, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 95²). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palokita: {'def': '﹐【中】坏、崩溃(=palujjana)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palubbhati: {'def': '(pa+lubh), 诱惑', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paluddha: {'def': '[pp. of pa+lubh] seduced, enticed S.IV,307 (where id. p. M.I,511 reads paladdha); J.I,158; VI,255, 262. See also palobheti & palobhita. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(palubbhati 的【过分】), 已很执着，已诱惑。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(palubbhati 的【过分】), 已诱惑，已很执著(seduced, enticed S.IV,307.(where id. p. M.I,511. reads paladdha). See also palobheti & palobhita.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palugga: {'def': '[pp. of palujjati, Sk. *prarugṇa] broken up, crushed, crumbled Bu II.24; Miln.217. (Page 441)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Palujjati的【过分】跌倒，崩溃，被溶解。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palujjana: {'def': '【中】崩溃，毁灭(breaking up, destruction )。cf. palokita(崩溃)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】崩溃。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. palujjati] breaking up, destruction SnA 506. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palujjati: {'def': '[Pass. of palujati=pa+ruj] to break (intrs.) to fall down, crumble, to be dissolved Vin.II,284; D.II,181; M.I,488; S.II,218; III,137; IV,52=Nd² 550 (in exegesis of “loka”); Miln.8; Vism.416. -- pp. palugga (q. v.). Cp. BSk. pralujyati MVastu II.370. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+luj+ya), 跌倒，崩溃，被溶解。【过】palujji。【现分】palujjamāna。【独】palujjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + luj + ya), 跌倒，崩溃，被溶解。【过】 ~jji。【现分】 ~jamāna，【独】 ~jitvā。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Palumpati: {'def': '[pa+lup] to rob, plunder, deprive of A.I,48. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+lup),抢劫(to rob, plunder, deprive of A.I,48.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palāla: {'def': '【中】稻草。 ~puñja, 【阳】稻草堆。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp.Ved.& Epic Sk.palāla), 【阳】【中】稻草(straw)。Palālachannaka﹐稻草屋顶(a roof of thatch)。palālapiṇḍa﹐(a bundle of straw)。palālapīṭhaka (Straw Seat；straw foot-stool；a kind of punishment or torture， i.e.being so beaten with clubs, that the bones are broken, and the body becomes like a heap of straw)。palālapuñja, palālapuñjaka,【阳】稻草堆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [cp. Ved. & Epic Sk. palāla] straw J.I,488; DhA.I,69.

--channaka a roof of thatch Th.1, 208. --piṇḍa a bundle of straw Vism.257=KhA 56. --pīṭhaka “straw foot-stool,” a kind of punishment or torture M.I,87= A.II,122=Miln.197 (see Miln.trsl. I.277 “Straw Seat,” i. e. being so beaten with clubs, that the bones are broken, and the body becomes like a heap of straw); Nd¹ 154; Nd² 604; J.V,273. --puñja a heap of straw D.I,71; M.III,3; A.I,241; II,210; Pug.68; VbhA.367. --puñjaka same as puñja Miln.342. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palāpa: {'def': '【阳】(玉黍蜀的)谷壳，废话，胡扯，无实质的。vacīpalāpo﹐废话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Vedic pralāpa, pa+lap; taken by P. Com. as identical with palāpa¹, their example followed by Trenckner, Notes 63, cp. also Miln. trsl. II.363 “chaff as frivolous talk”] prattling, prattle, nonsense; adj. talking idly, chaffing, idle, void M.III,80 (a°); S.I,166 (not palapaṁ), 192=Th.1, 1237; A.IV,169 (samaṇa° in allegory with yava° of palāpa¹); Sn.89 (māyāvin asaṁyata palāpa=palāpa-sadisattā SnA 165), 282= Miln.414 (here also expl^d as palāpa¹ by SnA 312); VbhA.104. In phrase tuccha palāpa empty and void at Miln.5, 10. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】（玉黍蜀的）谷壳，废话，胡扯，无实质的。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic palāva, cp. Lat. palea, Russ pelëva; see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 39⁶, where pralāva is to be corr. to palāva] chaff of corn, pollard A.IV,169 (yava°); J. I.467, 468; IV,34; SnA 165 (in exegesis of palāpa²; v. l. BB palāsa), 312 (id.); J.IV,34, 35 (perhaps better to read kula-palāso & palāsa-bhūta for palāpa). (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palāpeti: {'def': '(palāyati 的【使】), 使飞行。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Caus. of palāyati] to cause to run away, to put to flight, drive away J.II,433; DhA.I,164, 192; III,206. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [Caus. of pa+lap, cp. palāpa to which it may be referred as denom. ] to prattle, talk J.I,73, 195. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(palāyati 的【使】), 使飞行。【过】palāpesi。【过分】palāpita。【独】palāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palāpin: {'def': 'in apalāpin “not neglectful” see palāsin. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palāpī: {'def': '【阳】胡说八道的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】胡说八道的人。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Palāsa: {'def': '² & (more commonly) Paḷāsa [according to Trenckner, Notes 83, from ras, but BSk. pradāśa points to pa+ dāśa=dāsa “enemy” this form evidently a Sanskritisation] unmercifulness, malice, spite. Its nearest synonym is yuga-ggāha (so Vbh.357; Pug.18, where yuddhaggāha is read; J.III,259; VvA.71); it is often comb^d with macchera (Vv 15⁵) and makkha (Miln.289). ‹-› M.I,15, 36, 488; A.I,79; J.II,198; Vbh.357; Pug.18 (+paḷāsāyanā, etc.). --apaḷāsa mercifulness M.I,44. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (m. & nt.) [Vedic palāśa] 1. the tree Butea frondosa or Judas tree J.III,23 (in Palāsa Jātaka). -- 2. a leaf; collectively (nt.) foliage, pl. (nt.) leaves S.II,178; J.I,120 (nt.); III,210, 344; PvA.63 (°antare; so read for pās’antare), 113 (ghana°), 191 (sāli°). puppha° blossoms & leaves DhA.I,75; sākhā° branches & leaves M.I,111; J.I,164; Miln.254; paṇḍu° a sear leaf Vin.I,96; III,47; IV,217; bahala° (adj.) thick with leaves J.I,57. --palāsāni (pl.) leaves J.III,185 (=palāsapaṇṇāni C.); PvA.192 (=bhūsāni). (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】叶，树叶，恶意，怨恨。 ~sāda, 【形】吃树叶的。【阳】犀牛。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(Vedic palāwa),【阳】【中】1. 紧叔迦树、坚叔迦树、紧祝迦树，意译赤色花树或肉色花树(the tree Butea frondosa or Judas tree，印度婆罗门教的圣树。属豆科之巨木，树高四十尺至百尺，叶为羽状复叶，颇大，小叶约长五、六寸，无毛；花呈房状花序，色橙红，可炼制黄色或赤色染料，种子榨油则可作杀虫剂，多分布於印度北部喜马拉雅山至南方的斯里兰卡，以及缅甸。)2.树叶(a leaf; collectively (nt.) foliage)。palāsāda,【形】吃树叶的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2﹐Paḷāsa,【形】恶意，怨恨(unmercifulness, malice, spite)。apaḷāsa﹐无恶意，慈悯(mercifulness)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palāsata: {'def': '【阳】犀牛(rhinoceros)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[so read for palasata & palasada; cp. Vedic parasvant given by BR. in meaning “a certain large animal, perhaps the wild ass”] a rhinoceros J.V,206, 408; VI,277. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palāsika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. palāsa¹] 1. in cpd. paṇḍu° one who lives by eating withered leaves DA.I,270, 271. --2. in cpd. eka° (upāhanā) (a shoe) with one lining (i. e. of leaves) Vin.I,185 (=eka paṭala Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts II.13). (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palāsin: {'def': '(paḷāsin) (adj.) [fr. palāsa²] spiteful, unmerciful, malicious M.I,43 sq., 96; A.III,111; comb^d with makkhin at Vin.II,89 (cp. Vin Texts III,38); J.III,259. apaḷāsin D.III,47 (amakkhin+); M.I,43; A.III,111; Pug.22; see also separately. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palāsī: {'def': '【形】怀恨的，怀恶意的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】怀恨的，怀恶意的。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Palāta: {'def': '(palāyati 的【过分】)。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(palāyati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[contracted form of palāyita, pp. of palāyati, cp. Prk. palāa (=*palāta) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 567] run away J.VI,369; Vism.326; VvA.100; DhA.II,21. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palātatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. palāta] running away, escape J.I,72. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palāyana: {'def': '【中】逃走。 ~naka, 【形】逃避。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. palāy] running away DhA.I,164. See also pālana. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】逃走。palāyanaka,【形】逃避。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Palāyanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. palāy] running away J.II,210 (°ṁ karoti to put to flight). (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palāyati: {'def': '[cp. Vedic palāyati, palāy] to run (away) Vin.III,145 (ubbijjati uttasati p.); A.II,33 (yena vā tena vā palayanti); Sn.120; J.II,10; DhA.I,193; PvA.253, 284 (=dhāvati). -- ppr. palāyanto S.I,209=Th.2, 248 =Pv.II,7¹⁷=Nett 131=DhA.IV,21; aor. palāyi S.I,219; J.I,208; II,209, 219, 257; IV,420; DhA.III,208; DA.I,142; PvA.4, 274; ger. palāyitvā J.I,174; PvA.154; inf. palāyituṁ J.I,202; VI,420. -- Contracted forms are: pres. paleti (see also the analogy-form pāleti under pāleti, to guard) D.I,54 (spelt phaleti, expl^d DA.I,165 by gacchati); Sn.1074, 1144 (=vajati gacchati Nd² 423); Dh.49; Nd¹ 172; J.V,173, 241; Vv 84³⁶ (=gacchati VvA.345); Pv.I,11¹ (gacchati PvA.56); aor. palittha J.V,255; fut. palehiti Th.1, 307; imper. palehi Sn.831 (=gaccha SnA 542) -- pp. palāta & palāyita; Caus. palāpeti¹ (q. v.). (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pal+aya), 逃走，逃脱。【过】palāyi。【过分】palāta。【现分】palāyanta。【独】palāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pal + aya), 逃走，逃脱。【过】 palāyi。【过分】palāta。【现分】 ~yanta。【独】 ~yitvā。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Palāyin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. palāy] running away, taking to flight S.I,221=223. -- Usually neg. apalāyin S.I,185, and in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin S.I,99; Th.1, 864; J.IV,296 and passim. See apalāyin & apalāsin. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Palāyī: {'def': '【阳】逃者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】逃者。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Palāḷita: {'def': 'see palaḷita. (Page 440)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamaddana: {'def': '(‹pamaddati), 【形】【中】压服，战胜(crushing, defeating, overcoming)。parasenapamaddana, 摧伏敌军。id.=maddituṁ samattho SnA。mārasenapamaddana, 摧伏魔军。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. pamaddati] crushing, defeating, overcoming D.I,89 (°parasena°); Sn.p. 106 (id.=maddituṁ samattho SnA 450); Sn.561 (Mārasena°); DA.I,250. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamaddati: {'def': '[pa+mṛd] to crush down, destroy, overcome, defeat; pp. pamaddita J.VI,189 (mālutena p. corresponding with vāta-pahaṭa). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa彻底+ mad(梵mad / mand)使被发狂+a) 压倒，击败，战胜。【过】pamaddi。【过分】pamaddita。【独】pamadditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamaddin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pa+mṛd] crushing, able to crush, powerful, mighty J.IV,26 (=maddana-samattha C.). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamaddī: {'def': '(Pamaddin)(‹pa+ madd(梵mrd/ mrad)压碎),【阳】压服者，战胜者。(=maddana-samattha C.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamadā: {'def': '(f.) [Classical Sk. pramadā, fr. pra+mad, cp. pamāda] a young (wanton) woman, a woman Sn.156, 157 (gloss for pamāda cp. SnA 203); J.III,442 (marapamadānaṁ issaro; v. l. samuddā), 530 (v. l. pamuda, pamoda). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. pramadā, ‹pra+mad, cp. pamāda),【阴】女人(a young (wanton) woman, a woman)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamadāvana: {'def': '【中】在王宫附近的花园。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamajjanā: {'def': '【阴】pamajjana,【中】延迟，疏忽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) & °itatta (nt.) are abstr. formations fr. pa+mad, in the sense of pamāda carelessness etc., & occur as philological synonyms in exegesis of pamāda at Vbh.350=Nd¹ 423; Nd² 405. Also at DhA.I,228 (°bhāva=pamāda). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamajjati: {'def': '(pa+ mad(梵mad / mand)使被发狂+ya) 醉(becomes intoxicated)，粗心，怠惰，疏忽(日语：ゆだん,油断)。【过】pamajji。【过分】pamatta。【独】pamajjitvā，pamajja﹐pamajjiya。【不】pamajjituṁ。【现分】pamajjanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pa+mad] 1. to become intoxicated S.I,73. -- 2. to be careless, slothful, negligent; to neglect, waste one’s time S.IV,125, 133; Sn.676, 925, 933; cp. Nd¹ 376 & Nd² 70; Dh.168, 172, 259; J.III,264 (with Acc.); IV,396 (with Gen.); Pv.I,11¹² (dāne na p.); IV,13 (jāgaratha mā p.); Sdhp.16, 620. -- aor. 2 pl. pamādattha M.I,46; A.III,87; IV,139. Other noteworthy forms are aor. or precative (mā) pamādo S.IV,263; Th.1, 119; Dh.371 (see Geiger P.Gr. § 161 b), and cond. or aor. pamādassaṁ M.III,179; A.I,139 (see Geiger l. c. 170 & Trenckner Notes 75²). -- appamajjanto (ppr.) diligent, eager, zealous PvA.7. -- pp. pamatta (q. v.). (Page 415)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pa+mṛj] 1. to wipe off, rub off, sweep, scour Vin.I,47; II,209 (bhūmi° itabbā); M.I,383. -- 2. to rub along, stroke, grope, feel along (with one’s hands) Vin.II,209 (cīvara-rajjuṁ °itvā; cp. Vin. Texts III,279). ‹-› Note. pamajjamāna in phrase gale pi p° ānena at Nett 164 is after the example of similar passages M.I,108 and A.IV,32 and as indicated by v. l. preferably to be read as “api panujjamānena pi” (see panudati). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamathati: {'def': '(pa+math+a) 压迫，使服从。【过】pamathi。【过分】pamathita。【独】pamathitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamathita: {'def': '[pp. of pa+mathati to crush] crushed, only in cpd. sam° (q. v.). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamatta: {'def': '[pp. of pamajjati] slothful, indolent, indifferent, careless, negligent D.III,190; S.I,61=204; A.I,11, 139; IV,319; V,146; Sn.57, 70, 329 sq., 399, 1121; Dh.19, 21, 29, 292, 309 (=sati-vossaggena samannāgata DhA.III,482), 371; Nd² 404; PvA.276 (quot. °ṁ ativattati). appamatta diligent, careful, eager, mindful S.I,4, 140, 157; A.V,148; Th.1, 1245; Pv IV.1³⁸; PvA.66 (dānaṁ detha etc.), 219, 278. See also appamatta².

--cārin acting carelessly Dh.334 (=sati-vossagga-lakkhaṇena pamādena p.-c. DhA.IV,43). --bandhu friend of the careless (Ep. of Māra) S.I,123, 128; Sn.430; Nd² 507. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Pamajjati的【过分】)，已怠惰，已疏忽(的人)(slothful, indolent, indifferent, careless, negligent)。pamattabandhu ,【阳】粗心者的朋友(friend of the careless特指：魔王)。appamatta,【反】不怠惰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamattaka: {'def': '(=pamatta)【形】, 怠惰。只用於appamattaka, 不怠惰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.)=pamatta, only in neg. form ap° careful, mindful PvA.201. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamaññā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. pamāṇa, for *pamānyā, grd. form. of pa+mā for the usual pameyya] only neg. ap° immeasurableness Vbh.272 sq. (catasso appamaññāyo, viz. mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekhā). See appamaññā. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamaṭṭa: {'def': 'in cpd. luñcita-pamaṭṭā kapotī viya (simile for a woman who has lost all her hair) at PvA.47 is doubtful, it should probably be read as luñcita-pakkhikā k. viya i. e. like a pigeon whose feathers have been pulled out (v. l. °patthaka). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pameyya: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [grd. of pamināti, like Epic Sk. prameya] to be measured, measurable, only in foll. cpd. appameyya not to be measured, illimitable, unfathomable S.I,148; V,400; M.III,71, 127; A.I,266; Vv 34¹⁹ (=paminituṁ asakkhuṇeyya VvA.154); 37⁷ (expl^d as before at VvA.169); duppameyya hard to be gauged or measured A.I,266; Pug.35; opp. suppameyya ibid. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可量的，可限制的，可测的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamha: {'def': '(nt.) [the syncope form of pakhuma=Sk. pakṣman used in poetry and always expl^d in C. by pakhuma] eye-lash, usually in cpd. aḷāra° having thick eyelashes, e. g. at J.V,215; Vv 35⁷; 64¹¹; Pv III,3⁵; asāyata° at Th.2, 383. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】睫毛(the eye-lash)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamhayati: {'def': '[pa+smi, Sk. prasmayate] to laugh; Caus. pamhāpeti to make somebody laugh J.V,297 (=parihaseti C.), where it is syn. with the preceding umhāpeti. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamilāta: {'def': '[pp. of pa+mlā] faded, withered, languished Miln.303. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamināti: {'def': '[pa+mināti to mā with pres. formation fr. mi, after Sk. minoti; see also anumināti] to measure, estimate, define A.III,349, 351; V,140, 143; Sdhp.537. -- ppr. paminanto S.I,148; inf. paminituṁ VvA.154; ger. paminitvā Nd¹ 303, and pamāya (q. v.); grd. paminitabba VvA.278; aor. 3^rd sg. pāmesi J.V,299, 3^rd pl. pamiṁsu A.II,71; Th.1, 469 (pāmiṁsu). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamiṇāti: {'def': '(pa+mi +nā) 测量，估计，定义。【过】pamiṇi。【过分】pamita。【独】pamiṇitvā, pamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamocana: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pa+muc] loosening, setting free; deliverance, emancipation S.I,172=Sn.78; A.II,24, 37, 49 sq.; Sn.166 (maccupāsā, Abl.=from), 1064 (pamocanāya Dat.=pamocetuṁ Nd²); It.104 (Nibbānaṁ sabbagantha °ṁ). At Dh.274 we should read pamohanaṁ for pamocanaṁ. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】释放，放松，救出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamoceti: {'def': '(pa+muc释放+e) 释放，解脱。【过】pamocesi。【过分】pamocita。【独】pamocetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Caus. of pamuñcati (q. v.). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamoda: {'def': '[fr. pa+mud, cp. Vedic pramoda] joy, delight Sdhp.528, 563. See also pāmojja. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】高兴，欢喜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamodanā: {'def': '【阴】参考Pamoda。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. pa+mud] delight, joy, satisfaction Dhs.9, 86, 285 (āmodanā+). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamodati: {'def': '[pa+mud] to rejoice, enjoy, to be delighted, to be glad or satisfied S.I,182; A.III,34 (so read for ca modati); Dh.16, 22; Pv.I,11³, 11⁵; VvA.278 (=āmodati). -- Caus. pamodeti id. Sdhp.248. -- pp. pamudita (& pamodita) (q. v.). Cp. abhippamodati. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+mud+a)欢喜，享受，很高兴。【过】pamodi。【过分】pamodita。【现分】pamodamāna。【独】pamoditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamoha: {'def': '[pa+muh, cp. Epic Sk. pramoha] bewilderment, infatuation, fascination Sn.841 (v. l. Nd¹ sammoha); Nd¹ 193 (+sammoha andhakāra); J.VI,358; J.VI,358; Pug.21; Dhs.390, 1061. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamohana: {'def': '[fr. pa+muh] deceiving, deception, delusion Dh.274 (T. reads pamocana; DhA.III,403 expl^s by vañcana). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】骗局，错觉(deception; delusion)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamoheti: {'def': '(pa+ muh(梵muh)昏迷+e) 欺骗、使迷惑、使著迷(deceives; bewilders; fascinates)。【过】pamohesi。【过分】pamohita。【独】pamohetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamokkha: {'def': '【阳】释放(release)，解脱(deliverance)，解放(letting loose, discharge)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+muc, see pamuñcati] 1. discharging, launching, letting loose, gushing out; in phrases itivāda° pouring out gossip M.I,133; S.V,73; A.II,26; DA.I,21; and caravāda° id. S.III,12; V,419. -- 2. release, deliverance S.I,2; PvA.103 (pamutti+); Abl. pamokkhā for the release of, i. e. instead of (Gen.) J.V,30 (pituno p.=pamokkha-hetu C.). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pampaka: {'def': '[etym? Cp. Sk. pampā N. of a river (or lake), but cp. ref. in BR. under pampā varaṇ-ādi] a loris (Abhp. 618) i. e. an ape; but probably meant for a kind of bird (cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.) J.VI,538 (C. reads pampuka & expl^s by pampaṭaka). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】懒猴(a loris)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamuccati: {'def': 'Pass. of pamuñcati (q. v.). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+muc释放+ya)(pass. of pamuñcati)解脱，自由。【过】pamucci。【过分】Pamuccita。【独】pamuccitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamucchati: {'def': '(pa+mucch昏倒+a) 昏晕，昏倒。swoons; faints.【过】pamucchi。【过分】pamucchita。【独】pamucchitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamucchita: {'def': '[pa+mucchita] 1. swooning, in a faint, fainting (with hunger) Pv III,1⁸ (=khuppipāsādidukkhena sañjāta-mucchā PvA.174); IV,10⁸. -- 2. infatuated S.I,187 (v. l.; T. samucchita)=Th.1, 1219; J.III,441. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamudita: {'def': '(pamodati的【过分】)，已非常高兴(greatly delighted)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamukha: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [pa+mukha, cp. late Sk. pramukha] lit. “in front of the face,” fore-part, first, foremost, chief, prominent S.I,234, 235; Sn.791 (v. l. BB and Nd¹ 92 for pamuñca); J.V,5, 169. Loc. pamukhe as adv. or prep. “before” S.I,227 (asurindassa p.; v. l. sammukhe); Vism.120. As --° having as chief, headed by, with NN at the head D.II,97; S.I,79 (Pasenadi° rājāno); PvA.74 (setacchatta° rājakakudhabhaṇḍa); freq. in phrase Buddha° bhikkhusaṅgha, e. g. Vin.I,213; Sn.p. 111; PvA.19, 20. Cp. pāmokkha. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [identical with pamukha¹, lit. “in front of the face,” i. e. frontside, front] 1. eyebrow (?) only in phrase alāra° with thick eyebrows or lashes J.VI,503 (but expl^d by C. as “visāl’akkhigaṇḍa); PvA.189 (for aḷāra-pamha Pv III,3⁵). Perhaps we should read pakhuma instead. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(pa+mukha, cp. late Sk. pramukha),【形】最初的，首要的，显著的。【中】前面，房前。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamussati: {'def': '[pa+mṛṣ, Sk. mṛṣyati=P. *mussati] to forget J.III,132, 264 (pamajjati+); IV,147, 251. -- pamuṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+mus +ya) 忘记。【过】pamussi。【过分】pamuṭṭha。【独】pamussitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamutta: {'def': '参考pamuñcati。pamutti。【阴】自由，释放。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pamuñcati] 1. let loose, hurled J.VI,360 (papātasmiṁ). -- 2. liberated, set free S.I,154; Sn.465, 524 sq. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamutti: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pa+muc] setting free, release S.I,209; Th.2, 248; J.IV,478; Nett 131 (=S.I,209; but read pamutty atthi); PvA.103 (dukkhato). Pamudita (& °modita) [pp. of pamodati] greatly delighted, very pleased M.I,37; S.I,64; A.III,21 sq.; Sn.512; J.III,55; DA.I,217, ThA.71; PvA.77, 132. -- Spelt pamodita at Sn.681, J.I,75; V,45 (āmodita+). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamuyhati: {'def': '[pa+muyhati of muh] to become bewildered or infatuated J.VI,73. -- pp. pamūḷha (q. v.). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+ muh(梵muh)昏迷+ya) 迷惑、著迷(is bewildered or infatuate)。【过】pamuyhi。【独】pamuyhitvā, pamuyha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamuñca: {'def': '[fr. pa+muc] loosening, setting free or loose, in cpd. °kara deliverer S.I,193=Th.1, 1242 (bandhana°). -- adj. dup° difficult to be freed S.I,77;Sn.773; Dh.346; J.II,140. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamuñcati: {'def': '(pa+muc释放+ṁ-a) 1.释放，发出，解放(lets loose; emits; liberates)。2.放弃( to shake off, give up, shed)。【过】pamuñci。【过分】pamuñcita, pamutta。【独】pamuñciya, pamuñcitvā。【现分】pamuñcanta。2s.imp. pamuñcassu。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+muñcati of muc] 1. to let loose, give out, emit Sn.973 (vācaṁ;=sampamuñcati Nd¹ 504); J.I,216 (aggiṁ). -- 2. to shake off, give up, shed Dh.377 (pupphāni). Perhaps also in phrase saddhaṁ p. to renounce one’s faith, although the interpretation is doubtful (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 46 sq. & cp. Dial. II.33) Vin.I,7=D.II,39=S.I,138 (C. vissajjati, as quoted KS p. 174). -- 3. to deliver, free Sn.1063 (kathan kathāhi=mocehi uddhara etc. Nd² 407^a), 1146 (pamuñcassu=okappehi etc. Nd² 407^b). -- Pass. pamuccati to be delivered or freed S.I,24, 173; Sn.80, 170 sq. (dukkhā); Dh.189 (sabbadukkhā), 276 (fut. pamokkhati), 291 (dukkhā), 361. -- pp. pamutta (q. v.). -- Caus. pamoceti to remove, liberate, deliver, set free S.I,143, 154, 210; Th.2, 157 (dukkhā); Cp. II.7⁵; III,10³ sq. Caus. II. pamuñcāpeti to cause to get loose DA.I,138. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamuṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of pamussati] being or having forgotten Vin.I,213; Ps.I,173 (a°); J.III,511 (T. spells pamm°); IV,307 (id.); Miln.77. Cp. parimuṭṭha. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pamussati的【过分】) 已忘记(being or having forgotten)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamāda: {'def': '[cp. Vedic pramāda, pa+mad] carelessness, negligence, indolence, remissness D.I,6 (jūta°, see DA.I,85); III,42 sq., 236; M.I,151; S.I,18, 20, 25, 146, 216; II,43, 193; IV,78, 263; V,170, 397; A.I,212 (surāmerayamajja°)=S.II,69; A.I,16 sq.; II,40; III,6, 421, 449; IV,195, 294, 350; V,310, 361; Sn.156, 157 (gloss pamadā, cp. SnA 203), 334, 942, 1033; Dh.21, 30 sq., 167 (=satiossagga-lakkhaṇa p. DhA.III,163), 241, 371; Th.1, 1245=S.I,193; It.86; Nd¹ 423=Nd² 405; Ps.II,8 sq., 169 sq., 197; Pug.11, 12; Nett 13, 41; Miln.289 (māna atimāna mada+); SnA 339 (=sati-vippavāsa); DhA.I,228; PvA.16 (pamādena out of carelessness); Sdhp.600. -- appamāda earnestness, vigilance, zeal D.III,236; S.I,158; II,29; Dh.21.

--pāṭha careless reading (in the text) Nett Ṭ. (see introd. xi. n. 1); KhA 207; PvA.25. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic pramāda, pa+mad)﹐【阳】疏忽，懒惰，怠慢(carelessness, negligence, indolence, remissness)。pamādapāṭha,【中】一本猥亵的书。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamādavatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. pamāda+vant, adj.] remissness A.I,139. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamādin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pamāda] infatuating, exciting, in phrase citta° Th.2, 357 (trslⁿ “leading to ferment of the mind”; vv. ll. °pamaddin & °pamāthin, thus “crushing the heart,” cp. ThA.243). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamāreti: {'def': '[pa+māreti, Caus. of mṛ, marati to die] to strike dead, maltreat, hurt DhA.III,172. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamāya: {'def': '¹ [ger. of pamināti i. e. pa+mā] having measured, measuring Sn.894 (sayaṁ p.=paminitvā Nd¹ 303); J.III,114. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [ger. of pamināti i. e. pa+mṛ, Sk. pramārya of pramṛṇāti] crushing, destroying Sn.209 (bījaṁ;= hiṁsitva vadhitvā SnA 257). See on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 45. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (ger. of pamināti i. e. pa+mā)已测量(having measured, measuring)。【现分】pamāyanta(Nettivibhāvinī(CS:p.287)︰pamāyinaṁ pamāyantaṁ)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (ger. of pamināti i. e. pa+mr, Sk. pramārya of pramrṇāti)破坏(crushing, destroying)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamāyin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pa+mā] measuring, estimating, defining S.I,148 (appameyyaṁ p. “who to th’illimitable limit lays” trsl.; corresponds with paminanto). (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamāṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [of pa+mā, Vedic pramāṇa] 1. measure, size, amount S.II,235; A.I,88; III,52, 356 sq.; V,140 sq.; Miln.285 (cp. trsl. II.133, n. 2); SnA 137; VvA.16; PvA.55 (ghaṭa°), 70 (ekahattha°), 99 (tālakkhandha°), 268 (sīla°). -- 2. measure of time, compass, length, duration PvA.136 (jīvitaṁ paricchinna °ṁ); esp. in cpd. āyu° age S.I,151; A.I,213; II,126 sq. and passim (cp. āyu). -- 3. age (often by Com. taken as “worldly characteristic,” see below rūpa° and cp. Nd² 406 on Sn.1076); DhA.I,38. -- 4. limit PvA.123, 130 (dhanassa). -- 5. (appl^d meaning) standard, definition, description, dimension S.IV,158≈Sn.1076 (perhaps (“age”). pamāṇaṁ karoti set an example DhA.III,300 (maṁ p. katvā). -- adj. (-°) of characteristic, of the character of, measuring or measured by, taking the standard of, only in cpd. rūpa° measuring by (appearance or) form, or held in the sphere of form (defined or Pug.A 229 as “rūpa-ppamāṇ’ādisu sampattiyuttaṁ rūpaṁ pamāṇaṁ karotī ti”) A.II,71=Pug.53; Nd² 406. -- appamāṇa without a measure, unlimited, immeasurable, incomparable D.I,31; II,12 (+uḷāra); M.III,145 (ceto-vimutti); A.I,183, 192; II,73; III,52; V,299 sq., 344 sq.; Sn.507; PvA.110 (=atula). See also appamāṇa.

--kata taken as standard, set as example, being the measure, in phrase p.-kataṁ kammaṁ D.I,251; S.IV,322. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+mā, Vedic pramāṇa),【中】1.尺寸，大小，数量(measure, size, amount)，2.时间长短，周围，长度(measure of time, compass, length, duration)。3.年龄(age; often by Com. taken as “worldly characteristic,” ); 4.有限(limit)。5.引申为「正确的知见」，标准，准则(standard, definition, description, dimension)。Sn.1076.(ch.5-7)︰“Atthaṅgatassa na pamāṇamatthi, (Upasīvāti Bhagavā) Yena naṁ vajjuṁ taṁ tassa natthi. Sabbesu dhammesu samohatesu, samūhatā vādapathāpi sabbe”ti. ((世尊说：)这样的人(解脱者)消失后，形量不存在，人们谈论他的依据不存在，一切谈论方式也消失。」(注：谈论方式指确定事物的标志和特徵。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamāṇaka: {'def': '【形】用…测量的，有…大小的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamāṇavant: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pamāṇa] having a measure, finite; or: to be described, able to be defined Vin.II,110; A.II,73. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pamāṇika: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pamāṇa] 1. forming or taking a measure or standard, measuring by (-°) DhA.III,113 (rūpa° etc., see A.II,71); (n.) one who measures, a critic, judge A.III,349 sq.; V,140; Sdhp.441 (as pamāṇaka). -- 2. according to measure, by measure Vin.III,149; IV,279. (Page 416)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pamāṇa),【形】【中】度量，依照一般的测量的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pamūḷha: {'def': '(pamuyhati的【过分】) ，已迷惑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pamuyhati] bewildered, infatuated Sn.774; Nd¹ 36 (=sammūḷha), 193 (+sammūḷha). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pana: {'def': '(indecl.) [doublet of Sk. puna(ḥ) wiṭh diff. meaning (see puna), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34] adversative & interrogative particle, sometimes (originally, cp. puna “again, further”) merely connecting & continuing the story. -- (1) (adversative) but, on the contrary J.I,222; II,159; VvA.79 (correl. with tāva). ca pana “but” J.I,152; atha ca pana “and yet” D.I,139; J.I,279; na kho pana “certainly not” J.I,151; vā pana “or else” Vin.I,83; Dh.42; Sn.376, 829. -- (2) (in questions) then, now J.II,4 (kiṁ p.), 159 (kahaṁ p.); VvA.21 (kena p.); PvA.27 (katamaṁ p.). -- (3) (conclusive or copulative) and, and now, further, moreover D.I,139 (siyā kho p. be it now that . . .); Sn.23, 393, 396, 670; J.I,278; PvA.3. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(反意和疑问虚词)((adversative and interogative particle) ind.) 和，仍然，但是，正相反，既然，而且，此外。pan’assā = pana assā (assā ‹ ima(ṁ), f.Gen.sg.「她的」)而她的。panetā(pana+etā)﹐。pan’ettha﹐於此。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Panaccati: {'def': '[pa+naccati] to dance (forth), to dance ThA.257 (ppr. panaccanta). -- pp. panaccita (q. v.). (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panaccita: {'def': '[pp. of panaccati] dancing, made to dance Th.2, 390. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panasa: {'def': '【阳】菠萝蜜(jack tree)。【中】菠萝蜜果(jack fruit)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. late Sk. panasa, Lat. penus stores, Lith. p&etilde;nas fodder, perhaps Goth. fenea] the Jack or bread-fruit tree (Artocarpus integrifolia) and its fruit J.I,450; II,160; V,205, 465; Vv 44¹³; KhA 49, 50, 58 (°phala, where Vism.258 reads panasa-taca); SnA 475; VvA.147. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panassa: {'def': '(pana或又+assa彼(阳.单.属格))﹐又彼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Panassati: {'def': '(pa+nas +ya; cp.BSk. praṇāwa)被遗失、遗失、走向毁灭(to be lost, to disappear, to go to ruin)。【过】panassi。【过分】panattha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+nassati, cp. also BSk praṇāśa Divy 626] to be lost, to disappear, to go to ruin, to cease to be M.I,177; S.II,272 (read panassissati with BB); J.V,401; VI,239; Th.1, 143. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panaṭṭha: {'def': '(panassati的【过分】) 已遗失，已走向毁灭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pandita: {'def': '【形】明智的。【阳】明智的人。。 ~ka, 【阳】炫学者。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Panigghosa: {'def': 'in cpd. appanigghosa is wrongly registered as such in A Index (for A.IV,88); it is to be separated appa + nigghosa (see nigghosa). (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panna: {'def': '[pp. of pajjati but not satisfactorily expl^d as such, for pajjati & panna never occur by themselves, but only in cpds. like āpajjati, āpanna, upp°, upa°, sam°, etc. Besides, the word is only given in lexic. literature as pp. of pajjati, although a tendency prevails to regard it as pp. of patati. The meaning points more to the latter, but in form it cannot belong to pat. A more satisfactory explⁿ (in meaning and form) is to regard panna as pp. of pa+nam, with der. fr. short base. Thus panna would stand for panata (paṇata), as unna for unnata, ninna for ninnata, the double nn to be accounted for on analogy. The meaning would thus be “bent down, laid down,” as panna-ga= going bent, panna-dhaja=flag bent or laid down, etc. Perhaps patta of patta-kkhandha should belong here as panna°] fallen, gone, gone down; also: creeping, only in foll. cpds.:

--ga a snake Th.1, 429 (°inda chief of snake-demons); J.V,166; Miln.23. --gandha with gone down (i. e. deteriorated) smell, ill-smelling, or having lost its smell J.V,198 (=thokaṁ duggandha C.). --dhaja one whose flag gone or is lost, i. e. whose fight is over (Ep. of the Buddha), cp. BSk. prapātito māna-dhvajaḥ Lal. V, 448 (with derivation from pat instead of pad, cp. papātana) M.I,139 sq., 386; A.III,84 sq.; in eulogy on the Buddha (see exegesis to mahesi Nd¹ 343; Nd² 503) reference is made to mānadhaja (°papātanaṁ) which is opposed to dhamma-dhaja (-ussapana); thus we should explain as “one who has put down the flag of pride.” --bhāra one who has put down his burden, one whose load has gone, who is delivered or saved M.I,139; A.III,84; S.I,233; Dh.402 (=ohitakhandha-bhāra DhA.IV,168); Sn.626, 914 (cp Nd¹ 334); Th.1, 1021. --bhūmi state of one who has fallen DA.I,103 (opp. to jina-bhūmi, one of the 8 purisa-bhūmiyo. -- cp. D.I,54 & Dial. I.72²). --loma one whose hairs have fallen or are put down (flat, i. e. do not stand erect in consequence of excitement), subdued, pacified (opp. haṭṭha loma) Vin.II,184 (cp. Vin.II,5 & Bdhgh on p. 309 lomaṁ pāteti, Bdhgh pādeti; also Vin. Texts II.339); III,266; M.I,450; J.I,377. Another form is palloma (q. v. & cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 206). See also remarks on parada-vutta. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】跌落的，坠落的。pannabhāra,【形】已放下负担人。pannaloma,【形】已落发的人，即：抑制的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pannaga: {'def': '﹐【阳】蛇(a serpent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pannaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. panna] silent (?) DA.I,163. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pannarasa: {'def': '(adj. num.) [see pañcadasa & paṇṇarasa under pañca] fifteen (and fifteenth), usually referring to the 15th day of the lunar month, i. e. the full-moon day Sn.153 (pannaraso uposatho); pannarase on the 15^th day S.I,191=Th.1, 1234; M.III,20; Sn.502, 1016; f. Loc. pannarasāya id. S.I,233. See also paṇṇarasa. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【形】十五。pannarasamaṁ﹐第十五。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pannarasama: {'def': '(num. ord.) [fr. pannarasa] the 15^th SnA 366 (gāthā). (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pannarasika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pannarasa] belonging to the 15^th day (of the lunar month) Vin.IV,315. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panta: {'def': '【形】远的，遥远的，隐退的，独居的(distant, remote, secluded; solitary)。pantasenāsana,【中】隐退的休息处(a secluded resting place)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. prānta edge, margin, border, pra+anta; also BSk. prānta in meaning of Pali, e. g. MVastu III,200; Divy 312 (prānta-śayan-āsana-sevin)] distant, remote, solitary, secluded; only in phrase pantaṁ senāsanaṁ (sayanāsanaṁ) or pantāni senāsanāni “solitary bed & chair” M.I,17, 30; A.I,60; II,137; III,103; V,10, 202; Sn.72 (cp. Nd² 93), 338, 960 (°amhi sayanāsane), 969 (sayanamhi pante); Dh.185 (=vivitta DhA.III,238); Ud.43 (so read for patthañ); J.III,524 (°amhi sayanāsane); Vism.73 (panta-senāsane rata); SnA 263 (v. l. pattha).

--sena (adj.) one who has his resting place far away from men, Ep. of the Buddha M.I,386. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pantha: {'def': '【阳】路径、道路(a path, road)。panthaka, panthika【阳】旅客、旅行者(a wayfarer, traveller)。panthaghāta,【阳】埋伏(waylaying)，偷窃(robbery)。【中】panthadūhana。panthaghātaka,【阳】埋伏者，偷窃者(a waylayer)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[base panthan°, Ved. panthāḥ, with bases path° panth° and pathi. Same as patha (q. v.). For etym. cp. Gr. pόntos sea(-path), pάtos path, Av. pantā°, also Goth. finpan=E. find, of Idg *pent to come or go (by)] a road, roadway, path S.I,18 (Gen. pl. panthānaṁ= kantāramagga C; “jungle road” trsl.); Sn.121 (Loc. panthasmiṁ); Nd² 485 B (+patha in explⁿ of magga), Miln.157 (see panthaṁ)

--gū a traveller (lit. going by road) S.I,212 (v. l. addhagū, as at id. p. Th.2, 55); J.III,95 (v. l.). --ghāta highway robbery J.I,253; IV,184. --duhana waylaying, robbery; m. a robber D.I,135 (see DA.I,296); J.II,281, 388; D.III,68, and Tikp 280 (°dūhana). --dūbhin a highwayman J.II,327. --dūsaka a robber Miln.20. --devatā a way spirit, a spirit presiding over a road, road-goddess J.VI,527. --makkaṭaka a (road) spider Miln.364, 407. --sakuṇa a “road-bird,” i. e. a bird offered (as a sacrifice) to the goddess presiding over the roads, propitiation; it is here to be understood as a human sacrifice J.VI,527 (vv. ll. pattha° & bandha°). (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panthika: {'def': '[fr. pantha, formation panthika: panthan= addhika: addhan] a traveller Miln.20. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】